Deutsch
EnglishCONTROLS for your BMW 7 Series 2015-2021
CONTROLS
Cockpit ........................................................................................................ 38
Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................. 43
iDrive ............................................................................................................ 46
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ........................................................... 62
General settings ......................................................................................... 65
Opening and closing ................................................................................. 78
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel ....................................................... 109
Transporting children safely .................................................................. 127
Driving ....................................................................................................... 132
Displays ..................................................................................................... 150
Lights ......................................................................................................... 166
Safety ........................................................................................................ 174
Driving stability control systems ........................................................... 212
Driver assistance systems ..................................................................... 216
Driving comfort ........................................................................................ 265
Climate control ......................................................................................... 268
Interior equipment ................................................................................... 286
Storage compartments .......................................................................... 298
Cargo area ................................................................................................ 304
37
Cockpit
CONTROLS
Cockpit
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1
Seating comfort features
Gentleman functionꢀꢁ111
3
4
Safety switch for the windows and
roller sunblindsꢀꢁ104
Power windowsꢀꢁ103
Memory functionꢀꢁ122
Massage functionꢀꢁ124
5
6
Exterior mirror operationꢀꢁ119
Lights
2
Roller sunblind in the rear win‐
dowꢀꢁ104
38
Cockpit
CONTROLS
Night Visionꢀꢁ192
Light switchꢀꢁ166
High-beam Assistantꢀꢁ169
Widgets in the instrument clus‐
terꢀꢁ151
Trip dataꢀꢁ161
Lights off
9
Shift paddlesꢀꢁ147
10 Steering wheel buttons, left
Manual Speed Limiterꢀꢁ216
Automatic headlight controlꢀꢁ166
Daytime running lightsꢀꢁ168
Parking lightsꢀꢁ167
Depending on the equipment:
Cruise control on/offꢀꢁ218
Automatic headlight controlꢀꢁ166
Adaptive light functionsꢀꢁ168
High-beam Assistantꢀꢁ169
Low beamsꢀꢁ167
Active Cruise Control on/offꢀꢁ220
Depending on the equipment:
Active Cruise Control on/offꢀꢁ220
With steering and traffic jam assis‐
tantꢀꢁ230:
Instrument lightingꢀꢁ171
Cruise control, distance control and
lane guidance on/off
Right roadside parking lightꢀꢁ167
Left roadside parking lightꢀꢁ167
Cruise control: to store the speed
Pause or continue cruise control
7
8
Central locking system
Unlockingꢀꢁ88
Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐
tance
Lockingꢀꢁ88
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐
tance
Steering column stalk, left
Turn signalꢀꢁ140
Cruise control rocker switch
11 Instrument clusterꢀꢁ150
12 Steering wheel buttons, right
Selection listsꢀꢁ161
High beams, head‐
light flasherꢀꢁ141
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communicationꢀꢁ8
39
Cockpit
CONTROLS
Voice activation systemꢀꢁ54
15
16
17
18
19
Horn, entire surface
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communicationꢀꢁ8
Heated steering wheelꢀꢁ122
Adjusting the steering wheelꢀꢁ121
Unlocking the hoodꢀꢁ359
Thumbwheel for selection listsꢀꢁ161
13 Steering column stalk, right
Wipersꢀꢁ141
Rain sensorꢀꢁ142
Opening and closing the trunk
lidꢀꢁ93
Cleaning the windshieldꢀꢁ143
20 Glove compartmentꢀꢁ299
14
Switching drive-ready state on/
offꢀꢁ132
Auto Start/Stop functionꢀꢁ132
40
Cockpit
CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the center console
1
2
3
Control Displayꢀꢁ49
Ventilationꢀꢁ273
9
PDC Park Distance Controlꢀꢁ236
Without Surround View: rearview
cameraꢀꢁ241
Hazard warning systemꢀꢁ373
Surround Viewꢀꢁ243
Cross traffic warningꢀꢁ261
Parking Assistantꢀꢁ250
Remote Control Parkingꢀꢁ257
Intelligent Safetyꢀꢁ177
4
5
Glove compartmentꢀꢁ298
Surround View: Panorama
Viewꢀꢁ243
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐
tionꢀꢁ8
Air suspension level adjust‐
mentꢀꢁ265
6
7
8
Automatic climate controlꢀꢁ268
Controller with buttonsꢀꢁ49
Parking brakeꢀꢁ137
10
Driving Dynamics Controlꢀꢁ135
SPORT driving mode
COMFORT driving mode
Automatic Holdꢀꢁ138
ECO PRO driving mode
41
Cockpit
CONTROLS
ADAPTIVE driving mode
11 Steptronic transmission selector leverꢀꢁ144
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
trolꢀꢁ212
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1
2
3
4
Emergency Request, SOSꢀꢁ375
Glass sunroofꢀꢁ105
5
6
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment: opening the rear sun protec‐
tionꢀꢁ107
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
ment: closing the rear sun protec‐
tionꢀꢁ107
Indicator light, front-seat passenger
airbagꢀꢁ177
Interior lightsꢀꢁ171
Reading lightsꢀꢁ171
42
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Operating state of the vehicle
Safety information
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
General information
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one
of the three states:
▷ Idle state.
Warning
▷ Standby state.
▷ Drive-ready state.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
Idle state
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Concept
If the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off. All
power consumers are deactivated.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from
the outside and after exiting and locking.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Automatic idle state
The idle state is automatically established under
the following conditions:
43
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
Standby state
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
Concept
When standby state is switched on, most func‐
tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary.
Desired settings can be adjusted.
▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive, if one of
the front doors is opened when exiting the
vehicle.
The idle state is not automatically established
while a phone call is active.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the front
doors are opened from the outside.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
Via iDrive:
Display in the instrument cluster
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Manual idle state
To establish idle state in the vehicle after end of
trip:
Drive-ready state
Concept
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
General information
Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability
Control, can only be used with drive-ready state
switched on.
Safety information
Press and hold the button until
the OFF indicator on the instru‐
ment cluster goes out.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐
late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to
life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐
ficient ventilation.
44
Operating state of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Gasoline engine
Warning
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case,
the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is switched on, the tach‐
ometer shows the current engine speed.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
Switching off drive-ready state
Steptronic transmission
1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐
hicle stopped.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
NOTICE
In the case of repeated starting attempts or re‐
peated starting in quick succession, the fuel is
not burned or is inadequately burned. The cata‐
lytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of
damage to property. Avoid repeated starting in
quick succession.
3. Set the parking brake.
Switching on drive-ready state
Concept
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:
Steptronic transmission
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a brief
time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐
ment cluster light up for a varied length of time.
45
iDrive
CONTROLS
iDrive
Input and display
Main menu
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
General information
The main menu is divided into two areas. The
left area contains menu items that can be used
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
contains widgets that provide quick access to
certain functions.
Operating concept
Concept
iDrive includes a large number of functions.
These functions can be operated via the Control‐
ler and, depending on the equipment version, via
touchscreen, voice activation system or gesture
control.
Media/Radio
All functions of the entertainment system,
e.g., radio and TV stations, connection with ex‐
ternal devices and music collection.
Safety information
Communication
Warning
Phone and message functions, e-mail and
calendar, and also the connection and manage‐
ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones.
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Navigation
Access to the navigation system, destination
input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map
views and other functions, such as Points of In‐
terest and areas to be avoided.
My Car
Information about vehicle status and trips.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and
also administration of driver profiles and range of
adjustments for vehicle and iDrive.
46
iDrive
CONTROLS
Apps
Management and access to apps and vehicle
Activating/deactivating the
functions
functions. Additional apps can be purchased
from the BMW Store.
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the function.
Widgets
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐
quently used functions. The configured widgets
display dynamic contents such as the navigation
map, and serve as interfaces at the same time.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Status information
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be selected when the
destination is entered, for example.
General information
The status field can be found in the upper area of
the Control Display. Status information is dis‐
played in the form of symbols.
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
Controller, touchscreen or the voice activation
system. The keyboard's display changes auto‐
matically.
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
Symbol
Function
HD Radio station is being received.
Satellite radio is switched on.
or
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Enter a blank space.
Use voice activation.
Confirm entry.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call.
Missed call.
Slide the input area to the left or
right.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Network search.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the choice
is narrowed down with every letter and number
and added automatically as needed.
Cellular network is not available.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
bile phone has been reached.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered
during entry for which data is available.
Roaming is active.
Locating is active.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
tered in all languages that are available in
iDrive.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
47
iDrive
CONTROLS
tinations, phone numbers and menu entries or
pages in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
Symbol Meaning
Reminder.
Settings are stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Sending not possible.
Overview
Entertainment symbols
Symbol
Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface.
WiFi.
Other symbols
1
Programmable memory buttons
Symbol Meaning
Check Control message.
Storing a function
The sound output has been
switched off.
A function can be stored on a programmable
memory button. A button with a stored function
can be overwritten with another function.
Request for the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
1. Select function via iDrive.
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
tion.
2.
Press and hold the desired button
until the displayed bar on the Control Display
has loaded completely.
Driver profile.
Messages.
Executing a function
Service requirements.
Information.
Stop.
Press the button.
The function will work immediately. This means,
for instance that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.
New data protection-related service
available.
Displaying the key assignment
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or
use objects.
Programmable memory buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐
The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of screen.
48
iDrive
CONTROLS
Deleting all button assignments
Safety information
All button assignments can be deleted.
NOTICE
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same
time.
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐
play. There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not place objects in the area in front of the
Control Display.
2. "OK"
Control Display and
Controller
Switching on/off automatically
Concept
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐
ing the Controller, touchpad, and touch screen.
The Control Display is switched on automatically
after unlocking.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Overview
Switching on/off manually
The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Screen off"
Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
1
2
Control Display with touchscreen
System limits
Controller with buttons and touchpad
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense solar
radiation, the brightness may be reduced down
to complete deactivation. Once the temperature
is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐
ditioning, the normal functions are restored.
Control Display
General information
To clean the Control Display, follow the care in‐
structions, refer to page 383.
Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐
rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller, refer to page 52.
49
iDrive
CONTROLS
Operation
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
ample.
Button Function
Opens the Media/Radio menu.
Opens destination input menu for
navigation.
Opens navigation map.
Opens the previous display.
Opens the Options menu.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example.
Operating via the Controller
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐
plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting a menu
Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Buttons on the Controller
2. Press the Controller.
Button Function
Select a widget
Opens the main menu.
1. Move the Controller to the right.
2. Select a widget.
Opens the Communication menu.
3. Press the Controller.
It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐
ment cluster, refer to page 151.
50
iDrive
CONTROLS
The current display closes and the previous
display is shown.
Adjusting the menu
Adjusting widgets
▷
Press the button.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
The previous display re-opens.
▷ Move the Controller to the right.
The new display opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
Via iDrive:
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐
justed.
Opening the Options menu
Press the button.
2. Tip the Controller up.
3. "Adjust main menu"
The "Options" menu is displayed.
The menu consists of various areas:
4. Select the desired adjustment:
▷ Add new widget: "Add widget".
▷ Help for the selected menu, for instance
"Help".
A maximum of four widgets can be dis‐
played per page.
▷ System settings, for instance "Control display
off".
▷ Add new page: "Add page".
▷ Control options for the selected main menu,
for instance for "Media/Radio".
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page".
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select
widget.
Changing settings
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
Via iDrive:
5. "Done"
Adjusting menu contents
The display of the menus of "MEDIA", "COM"
and "NAV" can be adjusted, for instance to re‐
move the entries of functions that are not used
from the menu.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
Via iDrive:
1. Select the menu.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
displayed.
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis‐
played.
7. Press the Controller.
Entering letters and numbers
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, for instance
"Settings", a new display appears.
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or numbers.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
2.
: confirm entry.
51
iDrive
CONTROLS
Deleting
Symbol Function
Entering letters and numbers
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. The en‐
try may require switching between letters and
numbers, refer to page 46.
Press the Controller: delete letters or
number.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the
Control Display.
Hold the Controller down: delete all
letters or numbers.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐
played in a text box.
▷ The set language determines what input is
possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
Entering special characters
The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
played in the list.
Input
Operation
Delete a charac‐ Swipe to the left on the
ter.
touchpad.
Operation via touchpad
General information
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using the
touchpad on the Controller.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐
per area of the touchpad.
Selecting functions
Via iDrive:
Enter an under‐ Swipe to the right in the
score.
lower area of the touchpad.
1. "CAR"
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be moved
via the touchpad.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Touchpad"
Function
Operation
5. Select the desired setting:
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
▷ "Character input": enter letters and num‐
bers.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out on the touch‐
pad with fingers.
▷ "Map": use the map.
▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐
lecting the list field.
Display menu.
Tap once.
▷ "Audio confirmation": pronounces entered
letters and numbers.
52
iDrive
CONTROLS
▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page".
Operation via touchscreen
General information
▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of
widget.
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
4. Tap "Done".
Showing/hiding the display bar
You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch
the screen with your fingers. Do not use any ob‐
jects.
At the top edge of the screen, it is possible to
show or hide a display bar with additional func‐
tions.
Opening the main menu
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐
play bar at the top edge of the screen.
Tap on the symbol.
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar
at the top edge of the screen.
Changing between displays
After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
An arrow indicates that additional displays can be
opened.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap arrow.
The main menu is displayed.
The new display opens.
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu.
It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐
ets and switch between pages. The adjustments
can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
Changing settings
Settings such as brightness can be changed via
the touchscreen.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.
Only the currently selected page can be ad‐
justed.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. To perform the desired setting:
2.
Tap the symbol in the main menu.
3. Select the desired adjustment:
▷ Add new widget:
lect desired widget.
Tap symbol and se‐
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
left, until the desired setting is displayed.
The requested widget will be inserted in
the relevant position. A maximum of four
widgets can be displayed per page.
▷
,
Tap on the symbol.
▷ Delete selected widget:
Tap symbol.
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".
53
iDrive
CONTROLS
the voice activation system to a limited ex‐
tent.
Entering letters and numbers
Input
▷ The system includes special microphones on
the driver side and the front passenger side.
1.
Tap the symbol on the touchscreen.
▷ ›...‹ denotes commands to use with the voice
activation system.
A keyboard appears in the Control Display.
2. Enter letters and numbers.
Functional requirements
Deleting
▷ A language must be set via iDrive that is sup‐
ported by the voice activation system. To set
the language, refer to page 67.
Symbol Function
Tapping the symbol: deletes the let‐
ter or number.
▷ Always say commands in the language of the
voice activation system.
Tapping and holding the symbol all
letters: deletes all letters or numbers.
Activating the voice activation
system
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
General information
There are various methods for activating the
voice activation feature:
Function
Operation
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate di‐
rection.
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
wake word.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin‐
gers.
▷ Active voice processing.
Display menu.
Tap once.
Then say the command. No other commands
may be available. In this case, operate the func‐
tion via iDrive.
Voice activation system
The voice activation can be terminated:
Press the button on the steering wheel
again or press ›Cancel‹.
Concept
The voice activation system can be used to op‐
erate functions with spoken commands. The
system supports you with announcements dur‐
ing input.
Button on the steering wheel
1.
Press the button on the steering
The voice control system and the feedback it
provides are not a substitute for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual.
wheel.
2. Wait for the signal.
3. Say the command.
General information
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐
hicle is stationary can only be operated via
54
iDrive
CONTROLS
The symbol on the Control Display indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is
active.
Active voice processing
General information
Active voice processing recognizes keywords
that are spoken in the car's interior. For instance,
if the name of a city is named, information for the
navigation will be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Wake word
General information
Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ will start
the system. Immediately following, the voice acti‐
vation can be continued with voice commands.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹.
2. Say the command.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Preset wake word
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐
vated and deactivated. The ›Hello BMW‹ option
activates the preset and personal wake word.
5. "Active speech processing"
Via iDrive:
Possible commands
General information
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Most contents on the Control Display can be
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐
tries. Speak these list entries out loud exactly as
they are shown in the list.
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Activation with "Hello BMW""
Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
Personal wake word
In addition to a preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹, a
personal wake word can be set up.
The status of the voice recognition is displayed
in the upper area of the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Example for function
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Personal keyword"
6. "Start recording"
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. ›Media and radio‹
3. ›Presets‹
For the "Start recording" option, online
speech processing must be available and ac‐
tivated. Alternatively, the personal wake word
can be entered using the Controller.
The stored stations are displayed on the Control
Display.
7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
55
iDrive
CONTROLS
The voice activation system can also be used to
operate most climate control functions, refer to
page 285.
▷ "Online speech processing".
▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under
"Personalization" in the data protection
menu.
The voice activation system can be used to enter
the destination, refer to Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive" in
the data protection menu.
Help on the voice activation system
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
Example for function
1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal
wake word.
▷ To have information on the operating princi‐
ple of the voice activation system read out
loud: ›General information on voice control‹.
2. ›How high is the outside temperature‹
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant provides
information about the external temperature.
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹.
Adjusting
Information for Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to initiate
an Emergency Request. In stressful situations,
the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can
unnecessarily delay the establishment of a
phone connection.
Setting the language
The language to be used for voice activation and
system announcements can be set.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 375,
close to the interior mirror.
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "System language"
6. Select the desired language.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
Setting the voice dialog
Concept
You can set the system to use standard dialog or
a short version.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant expands the
voice activation function to include additional
functions that improve interaction in the vehicle.
It is possible to ask questions about the current
state of the vehicle, for instance.
The short version of the voice dialog plays back
short messages in abbreviated form.
Via iDrive:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is connected
to other digital services such as the Concierge
service and is continually being developed.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
Functional requirement
The driver's profile is activated.
5. "Speech mode"
6. Select the desired setting.
Activate the following settings to access the full
range of functions:
56
iDrive
CONTROLS
▷ Noises from the front passenger or the rear
seat bench can impair the system. Avoid
making other noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
voice activation system. The function can be de‐
activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐
rupted, for instance due to background noise or
talking.
▷ Major language dialects can cause problems
with the voice recognition feature. Speak loud
and clear.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Using the voice activation
system of the smartphone
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can be
used via voice activation.
Activate voice command response on the smart‐
phone for this purpose.
5. "Speaking during voice output"
Online speech processing
1.
2.
Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
Online speech processing provides a dictation
function, a natural method of entering destina‐
tions and improves the quality of voice recogni‐
tion. To use the functions, data is transmitted to
a service provider via an encrypted connection
and stored locally there.
Voice command response is activated on the
smartphone.
Release the button.
Via iDrive:
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐
pears on the Control Display.
1. "CAR"
If it was not possible to activate voice command
response, the list of Bluetooth devices appears
on the Control Display.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language"
5. "Online speech processing"
BMW Gesture Control
Adjusting the volume
Concept
Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand
motion using BMW Gesture Control.
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the vol‐
ume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
System limits
▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead
to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and
glass sunroof closed.
57
iDrive
CONTROLS
Overview
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "User help display": the possible gesture
is shown on the Control Display.
The gestures that are performed underneath the
interior mirror are captured by a camera in the
roofliner.
▷ "Audio confirmation": an acoustic signal is
emitted once the gesture is recognized.
Carrying out gestures
Perform gestures underneath the interior mirror
and next to the steering wheel.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Execute gestures clearly.
2. "Settings"
The gestures can also be executed from the
front-passenger side.
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
5. "Gesture control"
Possible gestures
Gesture
Operation
Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the di‐ Accept call.
rection of the screen.
Select a highlighted entry in a list
during voice activation.
Confirm pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the Control Dis‐
play in the direction of the front-passenger side.
Reject call.
Close pop-up.
Terminate voice activation.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern
with the index finger stretched out forward.
The volume is increased.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
58
iDrive
CONTROLS
Gesture
Operation
Function
The volume is reduced.
Slowly move hand counterclockwise with the in‐
dex finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular motion.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand Surround View: turn camera
horizontally to the right or left.
view.
This gesture can only be exe‐
cuted while the vehicle is station‐
ary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐
ward.
Individually assignable gesture.
Reverse Skip function.
Hold your stretched out thumb to the left.
Hold your stretched out thumb to the right.
Forward Skip function.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch five Individually assignable gesture.
fingers out again.
Assigning gesture individually
System limits
Via iDrive:
Gesture recognition by the camera can be distur‐
bed by the following circumstances:
1. "CAR"
▷ The camera lens is covered.
2. "Settings"
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
3. "General settings"
4. "Gesture control"
▷ The camera lens is dirty. Clean the camera
lenses, refer to page 383.
5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or
"Function assignment gesture 2"
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
6. Select the desired setting.
59
iDrive
CONTROLS
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
Operation
Buttons on BMW Touch Command
Button Function
BMW Touch Command
Display the main menu.
or
Concept
BMW Touch Command is a tablet that can be
used to operate important vehicle functions.
Display the application being used.
Back.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, BMW
Touch Command is located in the rear console
or in the center armrest in the rear.
Connecting BMW Touch Command
Switch on BMW Touch Command.
The following functions can be used:
▷ Audio sources in the front.
▷ Interior lighting.
The connection is established automatically.
If the connection is not established automatically,
follow the instructions on BMW Touch Com‐
mand.
▷ Seat adjustments for front passenger seat
and seats in the rear.
▷ Sun protection.
Charging the rechargeable battery
▷ Climate control in the rear.
▷ Rear entertainment.
BMW Touch Command can be charged in the
rear center armrest.
Insert BMW Touch Command into the tray with
the screen facing upward. To charge the re‐
chargeable battery, insert BMW Touch Com‐
mand with the charging socket to the left.
Overview
Selecting menu items
1.
Tap on the symbol.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Select the desired menu item.
3. Select the desired setting.
1
2
3
BMW Touch Command
Switching on/off
Ejecting
Adjusting
Displays
Settings, such as brightness, can be entered.
1.
2.
Tap on the symbol.
Tap the symbol in the status field.
60
iDrive
CONTROLS
3. "Brightness"
4. Slide the bar to the right or left until the de‐
sired setting is displayed.
Language setting
Regardless of the set language on the Control
Display, a different language can be selected for
BMW Touch Command.
1.
2.
Tap on the symbol.
Tap the symbol in the status field.
3. "Language"
4. Select the desired setting.
Device information
Information about the device can be displayed in
the settings:
▷ License information.
▷ Version.
▷ Data protection statement.
61
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Vehicle features and
options
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the printed
Owner's Manual is the most current resource.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
After a software update in the
vehicle
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re‐
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Own‐
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest
information.
Functional requirement
The use of the Remote Software Upgrade re‐
quires an active ConnectedDrive contract.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
Information about the version
General information
The information about the version contains a de‐
scription of the updates that are included in the
Remote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been completed
successfully, the information about the version
can be displayed on the Control Display. The in‐
formation is available in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal at any time.
Concept
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐
date the software of the vehicle. Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade makes new functions, functional
enhancements or quality improvements availa‐
ble.
General information
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐
ble.
The upgrade will not be installed until it was con‐
firmed on the vehicle.
Displaying information about the
version
Via iDrive:
▷ The installation may take around 20 minutes.
▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
1. "CAR"
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐
lation.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Installed version:"
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐
tion.
62
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
5. "Search for upgrades"
Safety information
6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
Via BMW Connected app
1. Download the available upgrade to the smart‐
phone in the BMW Connected app.
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Con‐
nected app.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
3. Establish a WiFi and Bluetooth connection
between the smartphone and the vehicle.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
smartphone to the vehicle occurs while driv‐
ing.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Install the upgrade
General information
After successful download completion, installa‐
tion is offered once the vehicle is parked.
Search for and download of an
upgrade
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
General information
After the successful completion of the upgrade,
booked services, for example RTTI, will be reacti‐
vated automatically while driving.
There are various options to search for and
download an upgrade:
▷ Automatic.
▷ Via iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Via BMW Connected app.
▷ The battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ The external temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
Automatic
The available data for Remote Software Upgrade
is automatically loaded into the vehicle.
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ Hazard warning system is switched off.
▷ Transmission position P is engaged.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ Ensure cellular network reception so that an
error message can be sent, for example if the
installation is terminated.
63
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
▷ Close the windows.
If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
▷ Close the glass sunroof.
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as
a mobile phone.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle at the
start of the installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
Additional vehicle related functional require‐
ments are shown on the Control Display.
Install the upgrade later
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
▷ Hazard warning system.
▷ Central locking system.
▷ Parking lights.
▷ Horn.
▷ Alarm system.
▷ Emergency Request.
▷ Power windows.
▷ Glass sunroof.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐
nected app.
64
General settings
CONTROLS
General settings
Retrieving messages
Via iDrive:
Vehicle features and
options
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
3. Select the desired message.
Deleting messages
All messages, except Check Control messages
or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can
be deleted from the list.
Check Control messages or messages from the
vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Messages
Via iDrive:
1. Tip the Controller up.
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages arriv‐
ing in the vehicle in list form.
2. "Notifications"
3. Select desired message, for instance. SMS.
4.
Press the button.
General information
The following messages can be displayed:
▷ Traffic messages.
5. "Delete"
Adjusting
The following settings can be adjusted:
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Service requirements messages.
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
sages will be permitted.
▷ Communication messages, for example e-
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
▷ All messages or a limited time period for re‐
ceived messages.
▷ Messages from, e.g., the Concierge service
or the BMW Connected app.
Via iDrive:
▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.
1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
The number of messages is additionally dis‐
played in the status field.
The Messages menu can also be created as
Widget, refer to page 50.
3. "Settings"
4. Move the Controller to the right.
5. Select the desired setting.
65
General settings
CONTROLS
Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
Time
Setting the time zone
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time zone:"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Automatic time setting"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the time
Via iDrive:
Date
Setting the date
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date:"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes
are displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
8. Make the settings for the month and year.
9. "OK"
9. "OK"
Setting the time format
Via iDrive:
Setting the date format
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time format:"
6. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Date format:"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
66
General settings
CONTROLS
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Trip data settings
Concept
The intervals in which the trip data, refer to
page 161, will be reset can be configured.
Language
Setting the language
Via iDrive:
Resetting trip data
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Language:"
3. "General settings"
4. "Reset trip data"
5. Select the desired setting.
5. "System language"
6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Speed warning
Setting the voice dialog
For voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 56.
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
cause a warning to be issued.
General information
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Setting the units of
measurement
Depending on the country version, you can set
the units of measurement for some values, for in‐
stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐
ture.
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Warning at:"
3. "General settings"
4. "Units"
5. Select the desired menu item.
6. Select the desired setting.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is
displayed.
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
67
General settings
CONTROLS
4. "Driver Attention Camera"
5. Select the desired setting.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Speed warning"
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
by the steering wheel rim.
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
able sunglasses.
Setting your current speed as
the speed warning
Via iDrive:
Activating/deactivating
popup windows
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be activated
or deactivated.
3. "General settings"
4. "Speed warning"
5. "Select current speed"
Via iDrive:
Driver Attention Camera
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Concept
3. "General settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
A camera that monitors driver activity is located
in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates
the head position and eye opening and uses the
data to analyze the attention of the driver. This
system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐
tems, e.g.:
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
▷ Fatigue alert, refer to page 210.
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current
vehicle position
▷ Steering and traffic jam assistant with As‐
sisted Driving Plus, refer to page 230.
For the position in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 150.
Concept
Activating/deactivating
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the current
vehicle position can be displayed in the BMW
Connected app or in the ConnectedDrive cus‐
tomer portal.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
68
General settings
CONTROLS
Only make these settings while stationary.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
Activating/deactivating
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Vehicle tracking"
5. Select the desired setting.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Agree and activate all"
Control Display
All services and functions that are relevant for
data protection will be activated or deacti‐
vated.
Brightness
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Configuring the data transfer
The data transfer can be configured individually
for separate services.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
7. Press the Controller.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
5. "Configure services"
6. Select the desired setting.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
Data protection
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐
sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This
personal data can be permanently deleted using
iDrive.
Data transfer
Concept
The vehicle offers different services, whose use
requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐
vider. The data transfer can be deactivated for
some services.
General information
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted:
General information
When the data transfer is deactivated, the re‐
spective service cannot be used.
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Stored radio stations.
69
General settings
CONTROLS
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music hard disk.
Function
Connec‐
tion type
Making calls via the hands-free
system.
Bluetooth.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations.
▷ Phone book.
Using phone functions via iDrive
or touchscreen.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
▷ Login accounts.
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or
SMS.
Playing music from the smart‐
phone or the audio player.
Bluetooth or
USB.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 15 minutes.
USB storage device:
Playing music.
USB.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Playing videos from the smart‐
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
USB.
Deleting data
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.
Using the vehicle Internet ac‐
cess.
WiFi hotspot
via WiFi.
For resetting the vehicle to factory settings, refer
to page 77.
Using Apple CarPlay apps via
iDrive and voice operation.
Bluetooth
and WiFi.
Screen Mirroring:
WiFi.
Connecting mobile devices
to the vehicle
Showing the smartphone display
on the Control Display.
Concept
The following connection types require one-time
pairing with the vehicle:
Various connection types are available for using
mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection
type to select depends on the mobile device and
the desired function.
▷ Bluetooth.
▷ WiFi hotspot.
▷ Apple CarPlay.
▷ Screen Mirroring.
General information
The following overview shows possible functions
and the suitable connection types for them. The
scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐
vice.
Paired devices are automatically recognized later
on and connected to the vehicle.
70
General settings
CONTROLS
Safety information
Bluetooth connection
Warning
Functional requirements
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only
use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐
uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the
systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 71, with
Bluetooth interface.
▷ The remote control or BMW display key is in
the vehicle.
▷ The device is ready for operation.
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle, refer
to page 71, and on the device.
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the
Control Display.
Compatible devices
General information
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may
be required on the device; refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at
bluetooth.
Switching on Bluetooth
Via iDrive:
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed
or deviating software versions.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Displaying the vehicle identification
number and software part number
When looking for compatible devices, you may
have to state the vehicle identification number
and the software part number. These numbers
can be displayed in the vehicle.
5. "Bluetooth®"
6. Select setting.
Activating/deactivating
telephone functions
To use all supported functions of a mobile
phone, activate the desired functions in the vehi‐
cle prior to pairing the mobile phone with the ve‐
hicle as needed.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Via iDrive:
5. "Bluetooth® info"
6. "System information"
1. "COM"
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select the desired settings, for instance"Text
messages".
71
General settings
CONTROLS
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐
vice list on the mobile phone and start a new
device search.
Pairing the mobile device with
the vehicle
Via iDrive:
Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
function are paired.
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or
has only a limited remaining battery life.
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the
power-save mode where required.
5. Select the desired function:
▷ "Phone calls and Bluetooth® audio"
▷ "Audio"
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not
function anymore.
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for
mobile phone operation.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme
ambient temperatures.
A control number is displayed.
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
Why can phone functions not be used via iDrive?
▷ Phone functions are not configured for the
mobile phone.
Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
phone function.
8. Select Bluetooth connection if necessary:
"Use BMW iDrive for phone calls, Bluetooth®
audio, and apps."
Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
played or why are they incomplete?
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list, refer to
page 76.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card are
transmitted.
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book
entries with special characters.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
from social networks.
In this case, the following explanations can help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
connected?
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
transmitted is too high.
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐
stance due to stored information such as
notes.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
with other devices.
Reduce the data volume of the contact.
▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
72
General settings
CONTROLS
Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone function.
▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐
tor into the USB interface.
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the
phone after the last synchronization.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against me‐
chanical damage.
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload
contacts"
▷ Due to the large number of USB storage de‐
vices available on the market, it cannot be
guaranteed that every device is operable on
the vehicle.
How can the phone connection quality be im‐
proved?
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile phone, depending on the mobile
phone.
▷ Do not expose USB storage devices to ex‐
treme environmental conditions, such as very
high temperatures; refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless
charging tray.
▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐
niques, proper playback of the media stored
on the USB storage device cannot be guar‐
anteed in all cases.
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐
rately in the sound settings.
If all points in this list have been checked and the
required function is still not available, contact the
hotline, a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB storage device via
the onboard socket, when it is connected to
the USB interface.
USB connection
▷ Depending on how the USB storage device is
being used, settings may be required on the
USB storage device, refer to the owner's
manual of the device.
General information
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected to
the USB interface.
Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ Mobile phones.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
▷ USB storage devices.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB storage devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
and exFAT are the recommended formats.
A connected USB storage device will be sup‐
plied with charge current via the USB interface if
the device supports this. Follow the maximum
charge current of the USB interface.
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 71, with USB
interface.
The following uses are possible on USB interfa‐
ces with data transfer:
Connecting the device
Connect the USB storage device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to
page 293.
▷ Playing music files.
▷ Playing videos.
Follow the following when connecting:
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐
vice list, refer to page 76.
73
General settings
CONTROLS
"Internet connection"
WiFi hotspot
8. Move the Controller to the left.
9. Search for WiFi networks on the mobile de‐
vice. Select network name on the device.
Concept
Compatible devices with WiFi interface can use
the Internet connection of the vehicle via the
WiFi hotspot.
10.Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
nect.
The device is displayed in the device list, refer to
page 76.
General information
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the
Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can
be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐
spot.
Up to 10 devices can be connected to the
WiFi hotspot simultaneously.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 71, with ac‐
tivated WiFi interface.
All devices connected via the hotspot use this
data volume.
▷ WiFi is activated on the vehicle.
Deactivating Internet usage via
the WiFi hotspot
Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
volume is used up, for instance.
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
▷ Registration and data contract with a service
provider where required.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
Connecting a device to the
Internet via the WiFi hotspot
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
Using the Internet for the first time via the
WiFi hotspot requires registration and possibly a
data volume purchase from a service provider.
5. "Internet connection"
6. Select the required setting.
Depending on the country version, data volume
can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐
vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store.
Via iDrive:
Apple CarPlay preparation
1. "COM"
Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible
Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice operation
and iDrive.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Internet"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 71.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
6. Activate Internet usage via WiFi if necessary.
"Open settings"
7. Activate Internet usage.
74
General settings
CONTROLS
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation are
activated on the iPhone.
Operation
For more information, refer to the Integrated
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐
gation, Entertainment, Communication.
▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: Apple
CarPlay preparation.
Switching on Bluetooth and
CarPlay
Frequently Asked Questions
All requirements are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐
pected.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
In this case, the following explanations can help:
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
CarPlay can no longer be selected.
5. Select the following setting:
"Apple CarPlay"
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
list.
6. Activate the function.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
from the list of stored connections under
Bluetooth and under WiFi.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
Via iDrive:
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
1. "COM"
If the steps listed have been carried out and the
required function is still not available: contact the
hotline, a dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
5. "Phone calls and Bluetooth® audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on
the Control Display.
Screen Mirroring
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
General information
Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting)
of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐
play.
A control number is displayed.
7. Compare the control number displayed on
the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and con‐
firm that the two match.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible smartphone, refer to page 71,
with Screen Mirroring interface.
8. Select CarPlay:
"Confirm note and connect to Apple CarPlay"
▷ Screen Mirroring is switched on on the
smartphone.
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
played in the device list, refer to page 76.
▷ WiFi is switched on in the vehicle.
75
General settings
CONTROLS
▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐
sary, for instance authorization; see the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Activate WiFi in the vehicle
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
Displaying the device list
All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐
cle are displayed in the device list.
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
A maximum of 4 devices can be connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of 10
devices can be connected to the vehicle via WiFi.
A maximum of 20 devices will be detected.
5. "Wi-Fi®"
Pairing a smartphone with
Screen Mirroring
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "New device"
A symbol indicates, for which function a device is
used. When the icon is displayed in white, this
function is actively connected to the vehicle. The
icon is displayed in gray when the function of the
device is inactive.
5.
"Screen Mirroring"
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed on
the Control Display.
Symbol
Meaning
6. Search for WiFi devices in the surroundings
of the smartphone.
Telephone.
Bluetooth audio.
WiFi hotspot.
Apple CarPlay.
Screen Mirroring.
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on the
device display. Select the WiFi name of the
vehicle.
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive.
The device is connected and displayed in the
device list, refer to page 76.
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
Managing mobile devices
If a function is assigned to a device, the function
will be deactivated where appropriate for a de‐
vice that is already connected and the device will
be disconnected. Follow the information on the
Control Display.
General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐
matically recognized and reconnected when
standby state is switched on.
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the
mobile phone, such as contacts, has been
detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐
cle and can be used via iDrive.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
76
General settings
CONTROLS
3. Select the desired device.
4. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Disconnect device"
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
The device remains paired and can be
connected again.
3. "General settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
▷ "Connect device"
The functions that were assigned to the
device before disconnecting are assigned
to the device when it is reconnected. The
functions may be deactivated on a device
already connected.
When the stored settings in a driver profile are
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account,
these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive
account.
▷ "Delete device"
The device is disconnected and removed
from the device list.
Priority of the phones
When two mobile phones are connected to the
vehicle, you can specify the priority of the mobile
phones for reconnection.
Via iDrive:
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
5. "Priorities for telephones"
6. Select the desired device.
7. Turn the controller to select the priority for
the selected mobile phone.
Select the desired priority by sliding.
Resetting the vehicle
configuration
All individual settings can be reset to the factory
settings when the drive-ready state is switched
off.
77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
Safety information
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Remote control
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the vehicle
is delivered with two remote controls or one re‐
mote control and the BMW display key, refer to
page 83.
Each remote control contains a replaceable bat‐
tery, refer to page 81.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
Depending on the equipment and country ver‐
sion, various settings, refer to page 99, can be
configured for the button functions.
A driver profile, refer to page 94, with personal
settings can be assigned to a remote control.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
To provide information on maintenance require‐
ments, the service data is stored in the remote
control, refer to page 368.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
To prevent possible locking in of the remote
control, take the remote control with you when
exiting the vehicle.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
78
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and
fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on
the remote control again to unlock the other ve‐
hicle access points.
Overview
In addition, the following functions are executed:
▷ If a driver profile, refer to page 94, was as‐
signed to the remote control, this driver pro‐
file will be activated and the settings that are
stored in it will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. For switch‐
ing the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 171.
1
2
Unlocking
Locking
Stationary climate control through Remote
Engine Startꢀꢁ278
▷ The rear sun protection of the glass sunroof
is moved into the position where it was prior
to locking.
3
4
Opening the trunk lid
Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched off.
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer
to page 101, will be switched off.
After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle
is ready for operation, refer to page 44.
Unlocking
General information
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
The behavior of the vehicle when unlocking with
the remote control depends on the following set‐
tings, refer to page 99, for unlocking and lock‐
ing:
Convenient opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking.
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
The windows and the glass sunroof are opened,
as long as the button on the remote control is
pressed.
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 167, is
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked.
Locking
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during locking with
the remote control depends on the following set‐
tings, refer to page 99:
Unlocking the vehicle
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
a light signal or a sound signal.
Press the button on the remote control.
79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
in and out when the vehicle is locked and un‐
locked.
The windows, glass sunroof, and front sun pro‐
tection are closed as long as the button on the
remote control is pressed.
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 168, is activated during locking.
Switching on the interior and
exterior lights
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
Press the button on the remote control
with the vehicle locked.
The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐
onds after locking.
2.
Press the button on the remote control.
The following functions are executed:
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off. For switch‐
ing the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 171.
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
▷ The rear sun visor of the glass sunroof is
closed.
▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior light‐
ing, refer to page 167, will be switched on.
▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐
tion is switched on. This prevents the doors
from being unlocked using the lock buttons
or the door openers.
The light functions may depend on the ambient
brightness.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system, refer
to page 101, will be switched on.
Trunk lid
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be
switched off by means of the Start/Stop button.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
You can set up if the doors will be unlocked
when the trunk lid is opened with the remote
control. Settings, refer to page 99.
With Comfort Access:
convenient closing
Safety information
Safety information
Warning
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
Closing
Press and hold the button on the remote
control in the area close to the vehicle after
locking.
80
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow us‐
ing a pointed object and lift it out.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the posi‐
tive side facing up.
Headlight courtesy delay feature
on
5. Press the cover closed.
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or take
them to a collection point.
It is possible to adjust the duration of the head‐
light courtesy delay feature, refer to page 168.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the remote
control, refer to page 87.
Additional remote controls
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐
tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the
Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
If the lost remote control has an assigned driver
profile, refer to page 94, the connection to this
81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
remote control must be deleted. A new remote
control can then be assigned to the driver profile.
Switching the drive-ready state on
via emergency detection of the
remote control
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message, refer to page 152, is
displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to
page 81.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
Proceed as follows in this case:
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
1. Hold the remote control with its back against
the marked area on the steering column. Pay
attention to the display in the instrument
cluster.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
2. If the remote control is detected:
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
change the position of the remote control and re‐
peat the procedure.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in re‐
mote control?
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of
the wireless charging tray.
Place the remote control down at a different
location.
▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐
ices of the BMW Connected app include the
ability to lock and unlock a vehicle.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 87.
This requires an active BMW Connected‐
Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
must be installed on a smartphone.
▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
82
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
BMW display key
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
General information
The BMW display key is supplied with an addi‐
tional mechanical key. If the display key is used,
the mechanical key should be carried with you,
for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is
used like the integrated key, refer to page 87.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
The display key supports all functions of the
standard remote control.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
In addition, the following functions are also avail‐
able:
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
▷ Display status of the anti-theft warning sys‐
tem.
▷ Display service information.
▷ Call up range with available fuel.
Overview
▷ Stationary climate control through Remote
Engine Start
▷ Remote Control Parking.
Safety information
Warning
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from
the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the
remote control with you so that the vehicle can
be opened from the outside.
1
2
3
Opening the trunk lid
Unlocking
Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay feature
Warning
4
5
6
7
8
9
Locking
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Park button
Display
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
Back
Switch the display on/off
Micro-USB charging socket
83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change
between the pages.
Reception range
The number of available display key functions
depends on the distance from the vehicle.
If further information is available on a page, tap
the appropriate symbol.
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐
cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐
ble.
To return to the original page:
symbol beneath the display.
tap on the
▷ The status information can be called up in the
extended reception range.
Lower status line
The lower status line indicates whether or not
the display key is within reception range, refer to
page 84.
With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐
ing can be operated.
Without parked-car heating: the parked-car
ventilation can be operated.
▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐
tion range.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle,
you can display the last transmitted status in‐
formation from the vehicle.
▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐
ception range. It indicates when the last data
transfer from the vehicle took place.
The symbol is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception
range.
Switching on/off
The display will go out automatically after a brief
period to conserve battery power.
Display
To hide the display manually:
General information
The display is divided into the upper status line,
the information area, and the lower status line.
Press the button on the left side of the display
key. For an overview, refer to page 83.
To show the display:
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐
play key.
Upper status line
The upper status line displays the following infor‐
mation:
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
top to unlock the screen lock.
▷
Vehicle secured.
To switch off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
▷
Charge state of the display key battery.
2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
Information area
The information area can be used to access in‐
formation and perform additional functions.
3. "OK"
To switch the display on:
Press the button on the left side of the display
key.
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath
the information.
Operating concept
The relevant submenus can be accessed from
the following main menus:
A solid indicator denotes the current
page.
84
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
before using the display key for the first time
or if the key has not been used for an ex‐
tended period.
Main menu
Information/Function
"Security
information"
/
Door status.
Alarm system status.
▷ The display key can be used while it is being
charged via the USB port. If the battery is fully
discharged, it may take some time before the
display key can be used again.
After alarm triggering: date,
time, and reason for triggering
the alarm.
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐
teed that every charger will function properly.
The charging duration depends on the
charger used.
Window status.
Glass sunroof status.
"Vehicle
information"
Maintenance indicators of Con‐
dition Based Service CBS, re‐
fer to page 368.
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
charger and the display key.
Charging in the wireless charging tray may
heat up the tray and the display key.
Status of the roadside parking
lights.
At higher temperatures, the charge current
through the display key may be reduced, and
in isolated cases the charge process may be
interrupted temporarily.
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel.
"Precondit.
setting"
With parked-car heating: oper‐
ate parked-car heating, refer to
page 276.
▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐
less charging tray, make sure there are no
objects between it and the wireless charging
tray.
Without parked-car heating:
operate parked-car ventilation,
refer to page 276.
Stationary climate control
through Remote Engine Start,
refer to page 278
Safety information
Warning
"R/C parking" Remote Control Parking, refer
to page 257.
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
metal objects located between the device and
the tray can become very hot. If smart cards,
memory cards or cards with magnetic strips are
placed between the device and the tray, this
may impair card function. There is a risk of in‐
jury and risk of damage to property. When
charging mobile devices, make sure there are
no objects between the device and the tray.
Display key battery
General information
Follow the following information:
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery
declines, the display is switched off automati‐
cally. The battery must be recharged so that
the display can be switched back on. The op‐
erability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely discharged.
85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
Charging
Via USB
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
Connect the display key via the micro-USB
charging socket to a USB port.
In the wireless charging tray
Switching on drive-ready state via
emergency detection of the BMW
display key
1. Open the tray cover.
2. Place the display key into the middle of the
wireless charging tray in front of the cup
holder.
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the display key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the tray cover.
1. Hold the display key with its back against the
marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐
tention to the display in the instrument clus‐
ter.
Malfunction
General information
2. If the display key is detected:
A Check Control message is displayed.
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
If the display key is not detected, slightly change
the position of the display key and repeat the
procedure.
▷ The battery of the display key is discharged.
Charge the battery, refer to page 85.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be switched on
anymore or if the display does not respond to
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐
jects.
Press and hold the button on the left side of the
display key for at least 20 seconds, until some‐
thing appears on the display.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a charg‐
ing process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
86
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Removing
Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key also fits the glove compart‐
ment.
Safety information
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
Warning
For some country versions, unlocking from the
inside is only possible with special knowledge.
Locking/unlocking via the door
lock
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with the
door. The door handle can be moved. When
pulling the door handle with the integrated key
inserted, paint or the integrated key can be
damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Remove the integrated key before pulling
the outside door handle.
2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the
back under the cover and push the cover out.
3. Use the thumb of the hand on the door han‐
dle to push the cover toward the rear of the
vehicle.
87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
4. Remove the cover.
Overview
5. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Buttons for the central locking system.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via the
door lock.
Unlocking
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control, if necessary through emer‐
gency detection of the remote control, refer to
page 82.
Press the button.
Opening
▷
Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Buttons for the central
locking system
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door
to open the door. The other doors remain
locked.
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐
tem and interior lights come on.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on
the door to be opened; the first time unlocks
the door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activating
the remote control.
88
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
All you need to do is to have the remote control
with you, such as in your pants pocket.
Unlocking the vehicle
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the car's
interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the
door handle.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐
cle.
Locking
General information
▷ Opening trunk lid.
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐
tings, refer to page 99:
▷ Opening and closing the trunk lid with no-
touch activation.
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with
a light signal or a sound signal.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must
be located outside of the vehicle near the
doors.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 168, is activated during locking.
Unlocking
Locking the vehicle
General information
Close the driver's door.
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via
the Comfort Access depends on the following
settings, refer to page 99:
▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 167, is
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Safety information
Convenient closing
Safety information
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can be
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Closing
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof will be closed.
Press the button on the exterior of the trunk lid.
Opening the trunk lid
General information
If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
Opening and closing the trunk lid
with no-touch activation
Concept
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
The trunk lid can be opened and closed with no-
touch activation using the remote control you are
carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed
foot motion in the central rear area and the trunk
lid is opened or closed.
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
90
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
trunk lid may open or close inadvertently if you
unintentionally move your foot or if a foot move‐
ment is detected.
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If you open the trunk lid with no-touch activation,
locked doors will not be unlocked.
Safety information
Opening
Warning
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐
tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do
not touch the vehicle.
Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning
system flashes.
Moving your foot again will stop the opening mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
close the trunk lid.
Closing
Warning
Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
The hazard warning system flashes and an
acoustic signal sounds.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐
tion, and moving it one more time after that will
re-open the trunk lid.
NOTICE
Touchless vehicle unlocking and
locking
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Concept
The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐
proaches the locked vehicle with the remote
control.
Performing the foot movement
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐
prox. one arm's length away from the rear of
the vehicle.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the remote control, the vehicle will
be locked.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direction
of travel and immediately pull it back. With
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized
remote control is detected in the unlocking zone.
91
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles.
Functional requirements
▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
The vehicle will be locked when the remote con‐
trol leaves the locking zone.
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone,
the doors and trunk lid must be closed.
The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐
prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles.
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
doors and trunk lid must be closed.
If the remote control is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati‐
cally.
▷ If the vehicle was locked with the remote
control, it cannot be unlocked touchless. In
this case, unlock the vehicle using the out‐
side door handle.
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger
seat during locking and the safety belt of the
front passenger is engaged in the safety belt
buckle during locking:
▷ If the vehicle was unlocked with the remote
control, it cannot be locked touchless without
driving the vehicle first. In this case, lock the
vehicle using the outside door handle.
▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐
ond remote control can be located in the
locking zone.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐
locking and locking depends on the following
settings, refer to page 99:
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, touchless unlocking and locking
is not possible until after the vehicle has been
driven.
▷ If the automatic unlocking is active.
▷ If the automatic locking is active.
Malfunction
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐
er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐
cle on the driver's side.
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. For replacing the battery, refer to
page 81.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment with
high transmitting power.
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐
locked regardless of the side on which the
driver approaches the vehicle.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal
objects.
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐
nal.
Do not transport the remote control together
with metal objects.
▷ If the welcome light, refer to page 167, is
switched on when the vehicle is being un‐
locked.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from mo‐
bile phones or other electronic devices in di‐
rect proximity to the remote control.
▷ If the headlight courtesy delay feature, refer
to page 168, is activated during locking.
Do not transport the remote control together
with electronic devices.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded
out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and
locked.
92
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking
request recognition function on the door han‐
dles.
Opening and Closing
Opening
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the
vehicle using the buttons of the remote control
or using the integrated key, refer to page 87.
From the outside
Trunk lid
General information
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place the
remote control in the cargo area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, it is also possible to have the doors
unlocked. To perform settings, refer to
page 99.
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle,
then press the button on the outside of the
trunk lid.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
carry the remote control with you and then
press the button on the outside of the trunk
lid.
The trunk lid cannot be opened when the vehicle
is in valet parking mode, refer to page 98.
Safety information
▷
Press and hold the button on the re‐
mote control for approx. 1 second.
Warning
Depending on the setting, the doors may also
be unlocked. Opening with the remote con‐
trol, refer to page 80.
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear
during opening and closing.
From the inside
Press the button in the storage compart‐
ment of the driver's door.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid
is clear during opening and closing.
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening operation is interrupted:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote control.
Pressing again continues the opening mo‐
tion.
93
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐
er's door. Pressing again continues the open‐
ing motion.
Malfunction
In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate
the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow and
smooth motion.
Closing
Trunk emergency unlocking
From the outside
▷
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
With Comfort Access:
▷
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
trunk lid. The driver's door must be closed for
this purpose and the remote control must be
outside of the vehicle in the area of the trunk
lid.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk lid unlocks.
From the inside
Pull and hold the button in the storage
Automatic Soft Closing
Safety information
Warning
compartmenr of the driver's door.
The remote control must be located inside the
vehicle for this function.
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid is
closed.
Body parts can be jammed while operating the
doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐
ing opening and closing.
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Closing
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement.
To close the doors, push lightly.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk
lid.
Closing occurs automatically.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk
lid.
Driver profiles
Concept
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the clos‐
ing motion.
Driver profiles can be created to store personal
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple
drivers, each driver can create his personal driver
profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐
94
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
cle will automatically apply the stored settings in
the driver profile.
Setup assistant
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for
a limited period of time on the Welcome screen
to configure the most important settings for the
vehicle.
General information
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
Each driver profile can be protected with a PIN to
prevent other drivers from viewing and modifying
the stored settings.
The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐
lowing functions:
▷ Setting the system language.
In addition, a guest profile is available that can be
selected by any driver. The guest profile is active
when a personal driver profile has not been se‐
lected.
▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
▷ Non-ConnectedDrive countries: Assign pro‐
file name.
▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically
stored in the active driver profile or in the guest
profile.
Enable continuous synchronization between
the ConnectedDrive account and the driver
profile.
A remote control can be assigned to a driver pro‐
file so that the vehicle will apply the settings as
soon as the driver unlocks the vehicle. As soon
as the vehicle detects the remote control, the
corresponding driver profile will be activated.
Stored settings in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
count are transferred to the vehicle. If a Con‐
nectedDrive account has not yet been cre‐
ated, it must be created in the
ConnectedDrive portal.
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is
thereby possible to use these settings in other
BMW vehicles as well.
▷ Confirm the consent for the transmission of
vehicle related data.
▷ Configure the voice command to start the
voice command response.
▷ Switch on the gesture control.
Functional requirements
When switching the driver profile, the vehicle
must move at a maximum of walking speed.
The selected settings are stored in the active
driver's profile.
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated by any driver.
Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest
profile is active will be stored in the guest profile.
Welcome screen
After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐
come screen will be displayed.
The following actions can be carried out on the
Welcome screen:
In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐
matically active:
▷ Selecting a driver profile.
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet.
▷ Starting the set-up assistant.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the re‐
mote control that was used to unlock the ve‐
hicle.
This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐
ited period of time.
As soon as the engine is started or any button is
pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the
digital key that was used to unlock the vehi‐
cle.
95
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ It is not clear which driver profile must be ac‐
tivated.
mote control, the corresponding driver profile
will be activated.
The following limitations apply:
If the remote control is not carried with you or
the remote control is not recognized, the
driver profile can only be selected on the
Welcome screen when the PIN protection
has been set up.
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed.
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to
the guest profile.
▷ PIN protection is not possible.
6. "Activate linkage"
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
count.
Setting up PIN protection
A driver profile without recognition and without
PIN protection can be activated and changed by
any driver.
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐
vated without remote control and without digital
key if the PIN protection was not set up.
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Guest"
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection
was not set up or the PIN is not known, the driv‐
er's profile cannot be activated.
4. "Log in"
Creating a driver profile
A driver profile is created on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
ConnectedDrive countries: If PIN protection was
not set up or the PIN is not known, the driver's
profile can be activated with the access data of
the corresponding ConnectedDrive account.
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Create driver profile"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Driver recognition"
4. "using PIN"
ConnectedDrive countries: A ConnectedDrive
account must be assigned to a driver profile. An
existing account can be used or a new account
must be created.
Changing/canceling the
recognition function
Selecting recognition
If the vehicle and remote control will be handed
over for maintenance, for instance, the recogni‐
tion function should be canceled with the remote
control. The handed over remote control can
then no longer be used to access the personal
driver profile. If the driver profile was protected
with a PIN, undesired access will no longer be
possible.
The settings for the recognition are entered on
the Welcome screen or via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Driver recognition"
5. "with vehicle key"
If another remote control is assigned to a driver
profile, the current assignment must be canceled
first.
A remote control is assigned to the driver
profile. As soon as the vehicle detects the re‐
96
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
The name that was assigned when the driver
profile was set up can be changed via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Driver recognition"
4. "with vehicle key"
5. "Activate linkage"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Settings"
5. Enter a profile name.
Selecting a driver profile
6.
Select the symbol.
Depending on the recognition setting, the driver
profile will be selected automatically.
Selecting a profile picture
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will
be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Avatar"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
4. "Log in"
4. Select the desired profile picture.
Deleting the driver profile
Via iDrive:
All settings stored in the selected driver profile
are automatically applied.
1. "CAR"
Switching synchronization with
the ConnectedDrive account
on/off
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Settings"
4. "Remove driver profile"
5. Select the desired driver profile.
6. "Delete now"
ConnectedDrive countries:
The settings stored in the driver's profile are
synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive
account. This means that it is possible to use the
personal settings in other BMW vehicles with
ConnectedDrive access as well.
ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐
count will be retained.
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive
account is enabled in the setup assistant or via
iDrive:
System limits
A clear detection of the desired remote control
may not be possible in the following cases, for in‐
stance:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles"
3. "Settings"
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls with
him or her.
4. "Synchronize driver profile"
5. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
Renaming a driver profile
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:
97
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ When multiple remote controls are located
outside on the driver's side of the vehicle.
▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned
ConnectedDrive account.
If the remote control was not detected clearly,
unlock the vehicle by pressing button for the de‐
sired remote control.
Accessing the menu for the valet
parking mode
ConnectedDrive countries:
Via the switch-off screen
A driver profile can only be created and
After switching off drive-ready state the switch-
off screen will be displayed. Select the entry for
the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen.
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account
when cellular network reception is available.
The use of personal settings that are stored in
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is
subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐
tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐
able, or available in a non-compatible version, in
other vehicles.
Via the display bar at the upper edge
of the Control Display
1. Tip the Controller up
2. "Valet parking mode"
Via the vehicle settings
Via iDrive:
Valet parking mode
1. "CAR"
Concept
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is
locked and operation via iDrive is no longer pos‐
sible.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
For example, this mode can be used when the
vehicle is handed over for valet parking.
Activating the valet parking
mode
General information
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal set‐
tings cannot be changed and personal data can‐
not be displayed.
General information
Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN
must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet
parking mode at a future time.
Additionally, the following actions are carried out:
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated.
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.
The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐
pending on the active driver profile.
Driver profile with PIN
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐
file.
▷ The trunk lid can be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
Functional requirements
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
1. Select the desired setting:
"Lock tailgate as well"
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
98
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
Driver profile with PIN
Regardless of which driver activated the valet
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet
parking mode by entering his/her PIN.
2. "Activate now"
Driver profile without PIN
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
1. Select driver profile.
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile.
1. "PIN"
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode
must be deactivated by entering the assigned
ConnectedDrive access data.
2. Enter PIN.
3. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Lock tailgate as well"
Driver profile without PIN
The trunk lid will be locked and discon‐
nected from the central locking system.
The valet parking mode was activated by another
person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a
driver without a PIN has to enter the access data
for his ConnectedDrive account.
▷ "Activate linkage"
This PIN will be stored for the active driver
profile.
1. Select driver profile.
4. "Activate now"
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐
signed to the driver profile.
Guest profile
The guest profile is the active driver profile.
Guest profile
A PIN must be entered.
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was
activated in the guest profile.
1. "PIN"
2. Enter PIN.
1. Select guest profile.
3. Select the desired setting:
"Lock tailgate as well"
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐
vation.
The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking
mode must be deactivated via a personal driver
profile.
4. "Activate now"
This PIN can be used once to deactivate the
valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐
file.
Adjusting
Deactivating valet parking mode
General information
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐
played on the Control Display.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, various settings for opening and clos‐
ing are possible.
These settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐
pends on which driver profile is selected on the
lock screen.
99
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. "Doors/Access"
Unlocking and locking
4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
Doors
Via iDrive:
Locking the vehicle folds in the exterior mir‐
rors automatically. Unlocking the vehicle au‐
tomatically folds out the exterior mirrors.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Automatic unlocking
Via iDrive:
3. "Key button settings"
4.
Select the symbol.
1. "CAR"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Driver's door only"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Unlock at end of trip"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
the entire vehicle.
After drive-ready state is switched off by
pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked ve‐
hicle is automatically unlocked.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive:
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Lock automatically"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐
tion signals:
The vehicle locks automatically after a
while if no door is opened after unlocking.
▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking"
▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, lock‐
ing by one.
The vehicle locks automatically after you
drive off.
▷ With alarm system:
"Sound when locking/unlocking"
Trunk lid
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
Trunk lid and doors
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try version, this setting may not be offered.
Folding mirrors automatically
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
3. "Key button settings"
100
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
4.
Select the symbol.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐
ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐
ing the vehicle.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Tailgate"
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The trunk lid is opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnosis.
The trunk lid is opened and the doors are
unlocked.
The alarm system signals these changes visually
and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Comfort Access
Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
alarm may be suppressed.
Touchless locking/unlocking
1. "CAR"
▷ Visual alarm:
By flashing the exterior lighting.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Access"
Switching on/off
4. "Comfort Access"
When you unlock and lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or with Comfort Access,
the alarm system is switched off and on at the
same time.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Unlock when approaching"
▷ "Lock when walking away"
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
Establishing idle state after
opening the front doors
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 102.
3. "Doors/Access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Opening the trunk lid with the
alarm system switched on
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
Opening the front doors establishes the idle
state, refer to page 43.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐
tored again provided the doors are locked. The
hazard warning system flashes once.
Alarm system
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐
self in a dangerous situation.
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ Press the button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 seconds.
101
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote control
three times in succession.
Interior motion sensor
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
Indicator light on the interior
mirror
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized
action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at
sea or on a trailer.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds:
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐
ing.
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds,
then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds:
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off in such situations.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are
not correctly closed. Correctly closed access
points are secured.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
and interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is
locked.
When the still open access points are closed,
the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐
sor will be switched on.
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐
til drive-ready state is switched on, but no
longer than approx. 5 minutes:
Switching off the alarm
An alarm has been triggered.
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
if needed, through emergency detection of
the remote control, refer to page 82.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the
remote control on your person, grasp the
driver side or front passenger side door han‐
dle completely.
The alarm system responds in situations such as
attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is
towed.
102
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion.
Power windows
Safety information
Warning
For convenient opening via the remote control,
refer to page 78.
Closing
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the windows is clear
during opening and closing.
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
The window closes while the switch is being
held.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling again stops the motion.
Overview
Convenient closing via the remote control, refer
to page 78.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 88.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door frame
and window while a window is being closed.
Power windows
Safety switch
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing action is in‐
terrupted and the window opens slightly.
Functional requirements
The windows can be operated under the follow‐
ing conditions.
Safety information
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Warning
Accessories on the windows such as antennas
can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not install accessories in the area of
movement of the windows.
Opening
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch is being
held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
103
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The LED lights up if the safety function is
switched on.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice might
prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:
Rear window roller
sunblind
1.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec‐
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
General information
The safety switch, refer to page 104, in the driv‐
er's door can be used to prevent children from
operating the roller sunblind using the switches
in the rear, for instance.
2.
Pull the switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold
it there.
Overview
The window closes without jam protection.
Driver's door
Safety switch
Concept
With the safety switch, it is possible to block par‐
ticular functions in the rear. This makes sense,
for instance if children or animals are carried in
the rear.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
safety function is switched off automatically.
Button for the roller sunblind.
General information
The following functions can be locked by press‐
ing the safety switch:
Rear doors
▷ Seat adjustments in the rear.
▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows us‐
ing the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblind in the rear
window using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds in the side
windows using the switches in the rear.
▷ Operation of the rear sun protection using the
switches in the rear.
Button for the roller sunblind.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
104
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Operation
Overview
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open roller
sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
Hold the button down to operate the roller sun‐
blinds on the rear window and on the side win‐
dows at the same time.
Buttons for the roller sunblinds.
BMW Touch Command
The roller sunblind can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
Operation
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open roller
sunblind.
System limits
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blind after having activated it consecutively a
number of times, the overheating protection
mechanism is active. The system is blocked for a
limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐
tem cool.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
BMW Touch Command
The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low inte‐
rior temperatures.
The roller sunblinds can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
System limits
Roller sunblinds, rear side
windows
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blinds after having activated them consecutively
a number of times, the overheating protection
mechanism is active. The system is blocked for a
limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐
tem cool.
General information
The safety switch, refer to page 104, in the driv‐
er's door can be used to prevent children, for in‐
stance from operating the roller sunblinds using
the switches in the rear.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in‐
terior temperatures.
Glass sunroof
General information
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐
erated using the same switch.
105
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Depending on equipment: The rear sun protec‐
tion is operated using separate buttons.
▷ The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in
the tilted position. The sun protection does
not move.
Safety information
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Warning
Opening/closing the glass
sunroof and sun protection
separately
Body parts can be jammed when operating the
glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the glass
sunroof is clear during opening and closing.
▷ Press the switch in the desired
direction to the resistance
point and hold it there.
Overview
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
The glass sunroof closes
while the switch is being held.
If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position,
the sun protection closes.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past
the resistance point.
1
2
3
Opening/closing the glass sunroof/ front sun
protection.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the
sun protection is already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens automatically.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: close
the rear sun protection.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: open
the rear sun protection.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the
glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted
position, the sun protection closes automati‐
cally.
Functional requirements
The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be
operated under the following conditions.
Pressing the switch upward stops the motion.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
Opening/closing the glass
sunroof and sun protection
together
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ The remote control is in the car's interior.
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts
and the sun protection opens
slightly.
The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
tection move together. Pressing
the switch upward stops the motion.
106
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Convenient opening and convenient closing via
the remote control, refer to page 78.
Actions during unlocking/locking
If the vehicle is locked from the outside, the rear
sun protection is automatically closed.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 88.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the sun protection
automatically moves into the position where it
was prior to locking.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐
terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not
fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐
tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to
this comfort position.
Jam protection system
General information
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐
roof fully.
If the closing force exceeds a certain value when
closing the glass sunroof, the closing operation is
interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open
position, or it is stopped when closing from the
tilted position.
Depending on equipment:
opening/closing the rear sun
protection
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing from the open position
without jam protection
If there is an external danger, proceed as follows:
On the roofliner control panel
Press the button to open the rear sun
protection.
Press button again to stop the movement.
Press the button to close the rear sun
protection.
Press button again to stop the movement.
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
On the control panel in the rear
doors
It is not possible to operate the rear sun protec‐
tion via the switches in the rear if the safety func‐
tion, refer to page 104, is switched on.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐
ance point and hold until the glass sunroof
closes without jam protection. Make sure that
the closing area is clear.
Press the button to open the closed sun
protection or to close the open sun pro‐
tection.
Press button again to stop the movement.
Closing from the lifted position
without jam protection
When the button is pressed again, the sun pro‐
tection will move in the opposite direction.
In the event of danger, proceed as follows:
BMW Touch Command
The front and rear sun protection can also be op‐
erated using BMW Touch Command.
107
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protection.
Initializing after a power
interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or clos‐
ing process, the glass sunroof can only be oper‐
ated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the following
conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system
Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is complete:
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof
and sun protection have opened then closed
again.
108
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
Safety information
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Seat adjustments while driving can lead to un‐
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle con‐
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the
efficacy of the safety belt can no longer be en‐
sured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety
belt in an accident. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting
the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
most upright position as possible and do not
adjust again while driving.
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Follow the infor‐
mation in the following chapters:
Warning
▷ Seats, refer to page 109.
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 114.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 116.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 174.
Front seats
General information
The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the driver profile, refer to page 94, cur‐
rently used. When a driver profile is selected, the
stored position is called up automatically.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 122.
109
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Overview
Seat tilt
Move switch up or down.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Thigh support
Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Upper backrest
Backrest tilt
Backrest width
Lumbar support
Backrest tilt, head restraint
Forward/backward
Move switch forward or backward.
Thigh support
Push switch forward or backward.
Height
Push switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
Push switch up or down.
110
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
supported for upright posture.
Adjusting
Adjusting
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
▷ Press the front section of the button:
The upper backrest is inclined forward.
▷ Press the rear section of the button:
The upper backrest is inclined backward.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Concept
Gentleman function
Concept
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral
support when taking corners.
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with
the switches of the driver's seat, for instance to
increase the legroom in the rear.
General information
You can change the backrest width by adjusting
the side wings of the backrest.
Overview
To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle,
the backrest width temporarily opens fully.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
Gentleman function
The backrest width increases.
Switching on
Upper backrest
Concept
1.
Press the button. The LED lights up.
2. Adjust the front passenger seat on the driv‐
er's seat.
The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐
laxed seating position and reduces strain on the
shoulder muscles.
If needed, store the memory position, refer to
page 122, for the front passenger seat.
111
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Switching off
4
5
6
7
Folding the footrest out/in
Press and hold the button until the LED
goes out.
Forward/backward, seat tilt
Backrest tilt
The function deactivates itself automatically after
some time.
Adjust front passenger seat
Resetting to standard position
BMW Touch Command
The front passenger seat can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Rear seats
General information
The seat adjustment switches are located on the
center armrest of the rear seats.
Press the button to reset to standard
position.
If the safety switch, refer to page 104, is pressed,
the seats cannot be adjusted.
The process is canceled if the button is pressed
again.
Safety information
Upper backrest
Concept
The upper backrest supports the back in the
shoulder area. A correct setting leads to a re‐
laxed seating position and reduces strain on the
shoulder muscles.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when folding down
the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that the area of movement of
the center armrest is clear during folding down.
Overview
Adjusting
1
2
3
Resetting to standard position
Head restraint, upper backrest
Lumbar support
Push switch forward or backward.
112
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Lumbar support
Concept
Forward/backward
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region
of the spine. The lower back and the spine are
supported for upright posture.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front/rear section of
the button:
Push switch forward or backward.
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
Seat tilt
▷ Press the upper/lower section
of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Folding the footrest out/in
General information
The distance between the front passenger seat
and the rear seat must be sufficiently large to un‐
fold the footrest on the backrest of the front pas‐
senger seat.
Move switch up or down.
Backrest tilt
Adjusting
Press the upper or lower section
of the button.
Move switch forward or backward.
113
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting the front passenger
seat from the rear
Safety belts
Number of safety belts and
safety belt buckles
The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety belts
to ensure occupants' safety. However, they can
only offer protection when adjusted correctly.
Concept
The front passenger seat can be operated from
the rear, for instance to increase the legroom in
the rear.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seats are intended for the persons sitting on the
left and right.
General information
The switch for adjusting the upper backrest, re‐
fer to page 112, can be used to set the angle of
the screen in the rear on the passenger side.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats is
intended for the person sitting in the middle.
Adjusting
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐
tute for safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will
be correct for adult seat occupants of every build
if the seat is correctly adjusted.
1.
Press the button.
Safety information
2. Adjust the front passenger seat, for instance
forward/back.
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
safety belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to wear a sin‐
gle safety belt. Infants and children are not al‐
lowed on an occupant's lap, but must be trans‐
ported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
3.
Press the button to deactivate the
function.
The function deactivates itself automatically after
some time.
BMW Touch Command
The rear seats can also be operated via BMW
Touch Command.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
114
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing safety belts correctly.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including safety
belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the
following situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
ened once after driving away.
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts,
safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt retrac‐
tors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have
the safety belts checked after an accident at
the dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Unbuckling the safety belt
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
Belt loop
Correct use of safety belts
▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders.
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The safety belt may not press on
your stomach.
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
When fastening the safety belts on the rear
seats, make sure that the belt loop is closed.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward
around your upper body.
Safety belt reminder for driver's
seat and front passenger seat
Buckling the safety belt
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a signal
sounds. Make sure that the safety belts
are positioned correctly. The safety belt
115
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
reminder can also be activated if objects are
placed on the front passenger seat.
Safety information
Warning
Safety belt reminder for rear
seats
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
General information
The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐
vated each time the engine starts.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
The safety belt reminder is also activated when a
passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐
ing the trip.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐
minates after the engine is started.
Symbol Description
Warning
Green: the safety belt is buckled on
the corresponding rear seat.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Red: the safety belt is not buckled on
the corresponding rear seat.
Safety mode
In critical situations, for instance during an emer‐
gency stop, the front safety belts tighten auto‐
matically.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
If the situation passes without an accident occur‐
ring, the belt tension relaxes.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐
ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Front head restraints
General information
The current head restraint position can be stored
using the memory function, refer to page 122.
Active head restraint
In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain
severity, the active head restraint automatically
reduces the distance from the head.
116
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Have the active head restraint checked and if
necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it
was exposed to an accident.
Adjusting the side extensions
Adjusting the height
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐
ing position.
Push switch up or down.
Removing
If the vehicle is equipped with Executive Lounge
Seating: the height of the head restraint on the
front passenger side cannot be adjusted.
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Adjusting the distance: manual
head restraints
A missing protective effect due to removed or
not correctly adjusted head restraints can
cause injuries in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐
straint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the distance: power
head restraints
The head restraint is automatically repositioned
when the upper backrest is adjusted.
117
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Warning
Adjusting the height: manual
head restraints
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐
tective effect in the head and neck area. There
is a risk of injury.
The height of the outer head restraints can be
adjusted.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push
the head restraint down.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
After setting the height, make sure that the head
restraint engages correctly.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height: power head
restraints
Folding down the center head
restraint
General information
The height adjustment of the head restraint is
deactivated when the safety switch for the rear
windows, refer to page 104, has been pressed.
To improve the view to the rear, the center head
restraint can be folded to the rear. Only push the
head restraint down if no one will be sitting in the
center seat.
Switches in the vehicle
▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and
fold the head restraint backward.
Push the switch in the center armrest up or
down.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
118
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
3. Move the head restraint into the topmost po‐
sition.
Adjusting the side extensions
4. Close the pushbutton on the lower tab and
the pushbutton on the bottom of the head re‐
straint.
Fold the side extensions on the head restraint
forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐
ing position.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Exterior mirrors
Cushions for head restraints in
the rear
Only use the pillow when the vehicle is switched
off.
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile,
refer to page 94, currently in use. When a driver
profile is selected, the stored position is called up
automatically.
1. Pull the upper tab through the loop on the
top of the head restraint.
The current exterior mirror position can be stored
using the memory function, refer to page 122.
Safety information
Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the traffic behind
could be incorrectly estimated, for instance
while changing lanes. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind
by looking over your shoulder.
2. Close both pushbuttons.
119
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Overview
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as
needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
1
2
3
Adjusting
Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
Folding in and out
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the car's interior
mirror, refer to page 121, are used to control
this.
Adjusting electrically
Press the button.
The selected mirror moves along with the
button movement.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
Selecting a mirror
Concept
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other format‐
ting issue - low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass.
Activating
Folding in and out
1.
slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in vehicle washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side
mirror position.
Press the button.
Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
120
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Folding up
Press the vanity mirror up.
Interior mirror
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷ In the mirror glass.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Overview
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel movements.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of
accident. Adjustng the steering wheel while the
vehicle is stationary only.
Electric steering wheel
adjustment
General information
Functional requirements
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
The steering wheel setting is stored for the driver
profile, refer to page 94, currently in use. When a
driver profile is selected, the position is accessed
automatically when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
The current steering wheel position can be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 122.
Rear vanity mirror
Folding down
Adjusting
Press the vanity mirror.
Move the steering wheel to the preferred height
and angle to suit your seating position by press‐
ing the switch.
The vanity mirror folds down. The angle can be
adjusted by hand.
121
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Assistance getting in and out
General information
The steering wheel temporarily moves into the
highest position to make it easier to enter and
exit the vehicle.
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 94.
The following settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
▷ Lumbar support.
▷ Footrest.
Safety information
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is stationary.
Button for heated steering wheel
Switching on/off
Warning
Press the button.
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the heated steering
wheel activates automatically if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Overview
Front
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐
essary, retrieved using the memory function:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
122
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
fort to the rear passenger on the passenger's
side.
Rear
General information
The following settings are applied automatically
on system activation:
▷ The front passenger seat moves forward and
adjusts the height, if necessary.
▷ The backrest and head restraint of the front
passenger seat are inclined forward.
The memory buttons are located on the rear
doors.
▷ The tilt of the screen in the rear is adjusted to
the backrest incline of the front passenger
seat.
Storing
1. Set the desired position.
▷ The footrest on the backrest of the front pas‐
senger seat folds out.
▷ The backrest reclines to the back.
2.
Press the button. The writing on the
button lights up.
The adjusted end position can be manually ad‐
justed, refer to page 112, and if required stored
using the memory function, refer to page 122.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is
lit. A signal sounds.
Safety information
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
Warning
If the front passenger seat is set too far forward,
the view of the exterior mirror on the front pas‐
senger side may be limited. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the front passenger seat such
that the view on the exterior mirror is not ob‐
structed.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐
tons is pressed again.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position
on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.
BMW Touch Command
The memory function can also be operated on
the front passenger seat and in the rear via BMW
Touch Command.
Overview
Executive Lounge Seating
Concept
The Executive Lounge Seating function offers
maximum legroom and increased traveling com‐
123
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Executive Lounge Seating
Overview
Front
Switching on
Press the button.
Resetting to standard position
Massage function
Rear
Press the button to reset to standard
position.
The process is canceled if the button is pressed
again.
Massage function
Massage function
Concept
Depending on the program, the massage func‐
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
circulation and can avoid fatigue.
Switching on
Press the button once for each intensity
level.
General information
Eight different massage programs can be se‐
lected:
The maximum intensity level is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
▷ Pelvis activation.
Switching off
▷ Upper body activation.
▷ Full body activation.
▷ Back massage.
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
▷ Shoulder massage.
▷ Lumbar massage.
▷ Upper body training.
▷ Full body training.
124
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Rear
Adjusting the massage program
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
6. Select the desired setting.
Seat and armrest heating
Seat and armrest heating
Switching on
Concept
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The system heats seats and armrests as
needed.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
General information
Seat heating can also be used without armrest
heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as
needed.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to page 318,
the heating output is reduced.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes
after a stop, seat and armrest heating is activated
automatically with the temperature selected last.
Overview
Front
Switching off
Press and hold the button until the bar
display on the climate control display
goes out.
Seat heating distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and the
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
Via iDrive:
Seat and armrest heating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. Select a menu item:
▷ "Seat heating distribution"
125
Seats, mirrors, and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷ "Seat heating"
Active seat ventilation
▷ "Seat and armrest heating"
▷ "Seat and surface heating"
▷ "Seat/steering wheel heating"
▷ "Seat climate control"
Rear
▷ "Seat and surfaces climate control"
▷ "Seat climate/steer. wheel heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat
heating distribution.
Switching armrest heating on/off
Via iDrive:
Active seat ventilation
1. "CAR"
Switching on
2. "Settings"
Press the button once for each ventila‐
3. "Climate control"
tion level.
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
5. Select desired seat.
6. "Heat armrests together with seat"
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
The ventilation switches back by one level after a
short time.
Active seat ventilation
Switching off
Concept
Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
provide a comfortable seat temperature.
Press and hold the button until the bar
display on the climate control display
goes out.
Overview
Front
126
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
Always transport children in the
rear seat
Vehicle features and
options
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Transport children younger than 13 years of age
or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear seat
in suitable child restraint systems designed for
the age, weight and size of the child. Children
13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt
as soon as a suitable child restraint system can
no longer be used due to their age, weight, or
size.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Safety information
Warning
The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on
children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐
ble additional child restraint systems. The effi‐
cacy of safety gear, including safety belts, can
be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety
belt can cause additional injuries, for instance in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft,
150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Children on the front passenger
seat
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the front
passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and
side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐
activated. For automatic deactivation of front-
seat passenger airbags, refer to page 176.
127
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐
ited or compromised with incorrect seat adjust‐
ment or improper installation of the child seat.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
sure that the child restraint system fits securely
against the backrest. If possible, adjust the
backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐
rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats
and backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
Installing child restraint
systems
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
ating and safety information of the child restraint
system manufacturer when selecting, installing,
and using child restraint systems.
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air‐
bags are activated. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front-seat passenger air‐
bags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.
Safety information
Warning
The protective effect of child restraint systems
and their fastening systems which have been
damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐
ited or lost. For instance, a child can may not be
sufficiently restrained in the event of an acci‐
dent or braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags au‐
tomatically, refer to page 176.
Do not use damaged child restraint systems or
child restraint systems that have been exposed
to an accident, and replace them instead.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go
and, if possible, bring it up to medium height.
This seat position and height ensure the best
possible position for the belt and offers optimal
protection in the event of an accident.
Have damaged child restraint systems or child
restraint systems exposed to an accident and
their fastening systems checked and, where
applicable, replaced by the dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
If the upper anchor of the safety belt is located in
front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the
128
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
front passenger seat carefully forward until the
best possible belt guide position is reached.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
Backrest width
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
child restraint system in the front passenger seat,
open the backrest width completely. Do not
change the backrest width again and do not call
up a memory position.
Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐
ating and safety information from the child re‐
straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐
stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing
systems.
Child seat security
Mounts for the lower LATCH
anchors
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is
restrained by the internal harnesses.
The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐
ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
Locking the safety belt
If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are
not correctly engaged, the protective effect of
the LATCH child restraint fixing system can be
limited. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Make sure that the lower anchors are se‐
curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐
straint fixing system fits securely against the
backrest.
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system. The
safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
129
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
4. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
Position
erly connected.
Symbol
Meaning
5. After mounting, move the backrest back up
slightly so that the child restraint system rests
lightly against the backrest.
The corresponding symbol
shows the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
chors are marked with a pair, (2),
of LATCH symbols.
Child restraint systems
with tether strap
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
Safety information
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH positions
to fasten a child restraint system
on the middle seat. Use the ve‐
hicle safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐
fect can be reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as
it passes the upper anchor.
Before installing LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
child restraint system.
Warning
If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective
effect of the child restraint system is limited or
there is none. In certain situations, for instance
braking maneuvers or in case of an accident,
the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a
risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that
the rear backrests are locked.
Without comfort rear seats:
assembly of LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
er's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
NOTICE
The anchors for the upper retaining straps of
child restraint systems are only provided for
these retaining straps. When other objects are
mounted, the anchors can be damaged. There
is a risk of damage to property. Only mount
child restraint systems to the upper anchors.
With comfort rear seats:
assembly of LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their ba‐
sic position, refer to page 112.
2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest back
slightly.
3. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐
er's information.
130
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
anchor.
Anchors
Symbol
Meaning
5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
The respective symbol shows
the anchor for the upper retain‐
ing strap. Seats with an upper
top tether are marked with this
symbol. It can be found on the
rear seat backrest or the rear
window shelf.
Locking the doors and
windows in the rear
General information
In certain situations it may be advisable to secure
the rear doors and windows, for instance when
transporting children.
Routing the retaining strap
Doors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Direction of travel
Head restraint
Hook for upper retaining strap
Anchor
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.
Rear window shelf
Seat backrest
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Upper retaining strap
Safety switch for the rear
Press the button on the driver's door.
Attaching the upper retaining
strap to the anchor
This locks various functions so that they cannot
be operated from the rear. Safety switch, refer to
page 104.
1. Open the anchor cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the
supports or along both sides of the head re‐
straint to the anchor.
For the middle seat, guide it over or along
both sides of the head restraint to the anchor
where applicable.
131
Driving
CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle features and
options
Auto Start/Stop function
Concept
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The
function is activated from speeds of approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
Start/Stop button
Depending on the selected driving mode, refer to
page 135, the system is automatically activated
or deactivated.
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches drive-ready state on or
off, refer to page 43.
Engine stop
Drive-ready state is switched on
when you depress the brake
Functional requirements
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button.
Steptronic transmission
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state back off and standby state, re‐
fer to page 43, is switched back on.
The engine is switched off automatically during a
stop under the following conditions:
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position
D.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by
Automatic Hold.
Driving away
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Apply drive mode.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Drive away.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐
er's door is closed.
Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automatically
when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be
switched off manually:
▷ Press the brake pedal forcefully again from
the current pedal position.
132
Driving
CONTROLS
▷ Engage selector lever position P.
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or
cooled to the required level.
If all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the en‐
gine switches off.
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
Air conditioner when the engine is
switched off
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
perature.
▷ Engine cooling is required.
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐
ing wheel is being turned.
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ At higher elevations.
General information
The display in the tachometer in‐
dicates that the Auto Start/Stop
function is ready for an Automatic
engine start.
▷ The hood is unlocked.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Starting the engine
Functional requirements
Steptronic transmission
Total time with switched-off engine
ECO PRO, refer to page 318,
driving mode: depending on the
vehicle equipment, the total time
that the engine has been
The engine starts automatically under the follow‐
ing preconditions:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
switched off using the Auto Start/
Stop function is displayed on an automatic en‐
gine stop.
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press the
accelerator pedal.
The total time is automatically reset every time
the vehicle is refueled.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Functional limitations
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it will
not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐
lowing conditions are met:
▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
matic climate control is running.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
133
Driving
CONTROLS
Some indicator lights light up for a varied length
of time.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop
button.
Activating/deactivating the
system manually
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Concept
The engine is not automatically switched off.
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior when
the air conditioning is switched on.
The engine is started during an automatic engine
stop.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
the heating is switched on.
Using the button
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N or
R.
▷ Change from selector lever position P to N,
D, or R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement.
Press the button.
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop
function
Via selector lever position or Driving
Dynamics Control
Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐
try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety
of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The
Intelligent Auto Start/Stop function uses this in‐
formation to adapt to various traffic situations in a
proactive manner.
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated
in selector lever position M/S or in SPORT driv‐
ing mode of the Driving Dynamics Control.
Display
▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
For instance, this applies to the following situa‐
tions:
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐
tivated.
▷ If a situation is detected in which the stopping
time is expected to be very short, the engine
is not switched off automatically. A message
appears on the Control Display, depending
on the situation.
▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicle
needs to drive off immediately, the engine is
started automatically.
134
Driving
CONTROLS
▷ Engine characteristics.
▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Adaptive chassis.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
General information
▷ Air suspension.
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can
be switched off permanently, for instance when
leaving it.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
Steptronic transmission
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.
Overview
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐
matically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,
for instance if no driver is detected.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Malfunction
The selected driving mode is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches
off the engine automatically. A Check Control
message is displayed. It is possible to continue
driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Driving modes
Buttons in the vehicle
Driving Dynamics Control
Concept
Button
Driving
mode
Configuration
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
SPORT
SPORT
SPORT
INDIVIDUAL
SPORT
PLUS
General information
COMFORT COMFORT
The following systems are affected, for instance:
135
Driving
CONTROLS
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT is displayed in the instrument
Button
Driving
mode
Configuration
COMFORT COMFORT
PLUS
cluster.
ECO PRO
ADAPTIVE
INDIVIDUAL
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Concept
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐
cally.
Individual settings can be adjusted in the SPORT
INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Concept
3. "Driving mode"
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
Balanced tuning between dynamic and efficient
driving.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐
tings:
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
SPORT PLUS
Concept
COMFORT PLUS
Concept
Particularly comfortable tuning for optimum trav‐
eling comfort.
Dynamic tuning for maximum agility with an ad‐
justed drive.
Switching on
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until COM‐
FORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
SPORT
ECO PRO
Concept
Concept
Dynamic tuning for higher agility with an opti‐
mized chassis and suspension.
Efficient driving setting.
136
Driving
CONTROLS
Switching on
Press the button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General information
ter.
The individual configuration of the driving mode
is stored for the active driver profile. The last set
configuration is activated directly when the driv‐
ing mode is called up again.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Concept
Activating configuration of the
driving mode
Press the button for the desired driving mode
several times.
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode.
Configuration
Via iDrive:
Parking brake
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
from rolling when it is parked.
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Safety information
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
ADAPTIVE
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
Concept
Comfort-oriented driving mode, whose tuning is
automatically modified to the driving situation
and driving style.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming road
sections are considered.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Switching on
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
137
Driving
CONTROLS
Warning
While driving
General information
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
To use as emergency brake while driving.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
hard while the switch is being pulled.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and
the brake lights illuminate.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle
is stationary.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
With Emergency Stop Assistant
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly to ac‐
tivate the emergency stop function, refer to
page 207.
Overview
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking brake
Automatic release
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive away.
Setting
The LED and indicator light go out.
Automatic Hold
Concept
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
This system assists the driver by automatically
setting and releasing the brake, such as when
moving in stop-and-go traffic.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter illuminates red. The parking brake is
set.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when it
is stationary.
138
Driving
CONTROLS
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
General information
Under the following conditions, the parking brake
is automatically engaged:
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle
is stationary.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill
using the parking brake.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐
gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐
cle from rolling in a vehicle wash. There is a risk
of damage to property. Deactivate Automatic
Hold prior to entering the vehicle wash.
Display
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Safety information
Overview
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
Automatic Hold
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Establishing function readiness of
Automatic Hold
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the button.
The LED lights up.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
following actions:
The indicator light lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every new vehicle start, the last se‐
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
lected setting is active.
139
Driving
CONTROLS
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Malfunction
Function readiness is established and the driv‐
er's door is closed.
In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
parking brake:
After stepping on the brake pedal, for instance
when stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is au‐
tomatically secured against rolling.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐
stance with a wheel chock, after existing the ve‐
hicle.
The indicator light lights up green.
After a power failure
To reestablish parking brake functionality after a
power failure:
Driving off
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off.
1. Switch on standby state.
The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
cator light is no longer illuminated.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set
and then push.
Activating the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is
exited.
This process may take a few seconds. Some
mechanical sounds associated with this process
are normal.
The indicator light is no longer illumi‐
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
Turn signal
The parking brake is not set automatically, if the
drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐
cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐
vated.
Turn signal in exterior mirror
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in
the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on
the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Switching function readiness off
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
140
Driving
CONTROLS
Using turn signals
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low beams
are switched on.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
Wiper system
General information
1. "CAR"
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as
this may damage the wiper blades or cause them
to become worn more quickly.
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "One-touch turn signal"
5. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
Signaling briefly
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it
there for as long as you want the turn signal to
flash.
High beams,
headlight flasher
NOTICE
Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
141
Driving
CONTROLS
Switching on
Rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of the
rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, directly
in front of the interior mirror.
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
Safety information
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1.
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
accidentally start moving in vehicle washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti‐
vate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper system
switched on: when travel continues, the wipers
resume at their previous speed.
Activating
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐
tion, arrow 1.
Press the lever down.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
reaches its standard position.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may not
start.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Deactivating
Press the lever back into the standard position.
142
Driving
CONTROLS
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Cleaning the windshield
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of
the rain sensor.
Pull the lever.
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are automatically
heated while standby state is switched on.
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers to be
folded away from the windshield.
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at
low temperatures and obstruct the view. There
is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐
tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use
washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed.
General information
Important, for instance when changing the wiper
blades or for folding away under frosty condi‐
tions.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
wash pump cannot work as intended. There is
a risk of damage to property. Do not use the
washer system when the washer fluid reservoir
is empty.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the vehicle is switched off when the
wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐
ers are folded in when switching on.
143
Driving
CONTROLS
NOTICE
Steptronic transmission
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐
tor can overheat when switching on. There is a
risk of damage to property. Defrost the wind‐
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Concept
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐
tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐
sibility of manual shifting, if needed.
Safety information
Folding away the wipers
1. Switch on standby state.
Warning
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the
wipers stop in a close to vertical position.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing, for instance with the parking brake.
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle opera‐
tion. All gears for forward travel are activated au‐
tomatically.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the
windshield.
R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power,
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 145, in selector lever position N.
Parking position P
Folding down the wipers
After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper
system must be reactivated.
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
wheels in selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold
the wiper lever down again.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
3. Wipers return to their resting position and are
ready again for operation.
144
Driving
CONTROLS
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐
gaged.
2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐
lector lever lock.
▷ After the standby state has been switched off
when selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal
is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐
gaged.
Engaging selector lever
positions
3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the
brake pedal until you are ready to start.
Functional requirements
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to
change from selector lever position P to another
selector lever position.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical requirements are met.
Engaging selector lever position P
Engaging selector lever position D,
N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty
operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐
tion R.
▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐
sition P into another selector lever position.
Press button P.
1. Fasten driver's safety belt.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power for a short distance, for instance in
a vehicle wash, or be pushed.
145
Driving
CONTROLS
style. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on
the brake pedal.
Activating the Sport program
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold, refer
to page 138.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Press the selector lever to the left from selector
lever position D.
The vehicle can roll.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance S1.
NOTICE
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
vated.
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
switch standby state off in vehicle washes.
Ending the Sport program
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Irrespective of standby state, the selector lever
position P is automatically engaged after approx.
35 minutes.
Manual mode M/S
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to
change the selector lever position.
Concept
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 148.
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode.
Activating manual mode
1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐
tor lever position D, arrow 1.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐
ance point at the full throttle position.
Sport program M/S
Concept
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier driving
146
Driving
CONTROLS
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2.
General information
Shifting
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
road speeds.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, for instance M1.
Short-term manual mode
Shifting
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
After conservative driving in manual mode with‐
out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles
for a certain amount of time, the transmission
switches back to automatic mode.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.
The transmission continues shifting automati‐
cally in certain situations, for instance when
speed limits are reached.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode as
follows:
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift pad‐
dle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
If driving mode SPORT, refer to page 136, is se‐
lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does
not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached.
Continuous manual mode
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐
dle switches into manual mode permanently.
Depending on the BMW M drive configuration,
this function is active independently of the driv‐
ing mode.
Steptronic Sport transmission
With the appropriate transmission version, the
lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐
neously activating kickdown and operating the
left shift paddles. This is not possible in short-
term manual mode.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐
down.
Ending the manual mode
Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shifting
Shift paddles
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
hands on the steering wheel.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
147
Driving
CONTROLS
▷ The lowest possible gear can be selected by
pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
A Check Control message is displayed.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing, refer to page 377.
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
Launch Control
Concept
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the
engine.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away.
General information
The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must
audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button
pressed.
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
refer to page 312, period.
Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector
lever into selector lever position N and hold,
arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
Functional requirements
Launch Control is available when the engine is at
operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐
ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at
least 6 miles/10 km.
Start with launch control
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2.
Press the button.
148
Driving
CONTROLS
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐
ditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
149
Displays
CONTROLS
Displays
Overview
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
1
Fuel gaugeꢀꢁ155
Rangeꢀꢁ157
2
3
Speedometer
Central display areaꢀꢁ150
Service requirementsꢀꢁ157
Navigation display
Instrument cluster
Concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display.
When you change to a different program via Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control, the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster adapt to the respective driving
mode.
4
5
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐
tion Camera
Tachometerꢀꢁ156
Selection listsꢀꢁ161
Widgets in the instrument clusterꢀꢁ151
Trip odometer, see Trip dataꢀꢁ161
ECO PRO displaysꢀꢁ318
Status, Driving Dynamics Controlꢀꢁ135
Transmission displayꢀꢁ144
Engine temperatureꢀꢁ157
External temperatureꢀꢁ157
Check Controlꢀꢁ152
General information
The display change in the instrument cluster can
be deactivated via iDrive.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
6
7
8
9
Speed Limit Assistꢀꢁ228
Speed Limit Infoꢀꢁ159
Timeꢀꢁ66
Central display area
Depending on the equipment, the following is
displayed in the central display area of the instru‐
ment cluster:
150
Displays
CONTROLS
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or,
if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐
view with destination guidance information.
Widgets in the instrument
cluster
▷ Displays showing service requirements.
Concept
Displays for specific functions can be displayed
in the tachometer in the instrument cluster.
Some displays in the central display area can be
configured individually. Setting the displays in the
central display area, refer to page 151.
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐
ment version and country variant.
The following displays can be selected:
▷ Trip data, refer to page 161.
▷ Torque and power, refer to page 163.
▷ Acceleration power, refer to page 163.
Driving mode view
Concept
When the driving mode view is deactivated, the
displays in the instrument cluster remain un‐
changed and do not adapt to the respective driv‐
ing mode when the program is changed via Driv‐
ing Dynamics Control.
▷ Current entertainment source, for instance,
radio, refer to Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment and Communication.
▷ Efficiency display, refer to page 152.
Selecting
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Driving mode view"
Adjusting
Individual displays in the instrument cluster can
be configured individually.
Continue to press the button on the turn signal
lever until the desired widget is selected.
Display
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired setting.
151
Displays
CONTROLS
ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range, refer
to page 318.
Efficiency display
Concept
Information about driving style and consumption
can be displayed in the form of a consumption
display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for
example.
Check Control
Concept
The Check Control system monitors functions in
the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in
the monitored systems.
General information
Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐
ent information will be displayed:
General information
Driving
mode
Display
A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
bination of indicator or warning lights and text
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐
cable, in the Head-up Display.
COMFORT
SPORT
Current consumption.
Average consumption.
Energy recovery.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Display.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO bonus range.
Distance traveled in Coasting
mode.
Hiding Check Control messages
Current consumption.
Average consumption
The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐
sumption when driving a specific route.
Current consumption
The current consumption displays the current
consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐
rently driving in an efficient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Continuous display
Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions oc‐
cur at once, the messages are displayed consec‐
utively.
Energy recovery
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the
vehicle is converted into electric energy during
coasting. The vehicle battery is partially charged
and fuel consumption can be reduced.
The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐
onds. After this time, they are displayed again
automatically.
ECO PRO bonus range
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐
sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐
152
Displays
CONTROLS
Temporary display
Messages after trip completion
Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐
matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check
Control messages are stored and can be dis‐
played again later.
Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐
played again after drive-ready state is switched
off.
Indicator/warning lights
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Concept
Via iDrive:
Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster
display the status of some functions in the vehi‐
cle and indicate when a malfunction is present in
the monitored systems.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control"
4. Select the SMS text message.
General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐
ety of combinations and colors.
Display
Check Control
Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐
tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready
state is switched on.
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or stored.
Red lights
SMS text messages
SMS text messages in combination with a sym‐
bol in the instrument cluster explain a Check
Control message and the meaning of the indica‐
tor/warning lights.
Safety belt reminder
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated:
safety belt on the driver or passenger
side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are placed
on the front passenger seat.
Supplementary SMS text messages
Additional information, such as the reason for an
error or malfunction or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
With urgent messages the added text will be au‐
tomatically displayed on the Control Display.
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐
responding rear seat.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐
ther help can be selected.
Via iDrive:
Airbag system
1. "CAR"
Airbag system and belt tensioner may
not be working.
2. "Vehicle status"
3.
"Check Control"
4. Select the desired text message.
5. Select the desired setting.
153
Displays
CONTROLS
Have the vehicle checked immediately by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic
Traction Control is activated
DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
Parking brake
DSC, refer to page 212, and DTC, refer
to page 214.
The parking brake is set.
For releasing the parking brake, refer to
page 138.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Brake system
Braking system impaired. Continue to
drive moderately.
Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 350.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire infla‐
tion pressure or a flat tire. Follow the in‐
formation in the Check Control message.
Yellow lights
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
The Brake Assistant function may not
activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the
longer braking distance into account.
The indicator light flashes and then continuously
lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire inflation pres‐
sure can be detected.
Have the system immediately checked
by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
with the same radio frequency: after leaving
the area of the interference, the system auto‐
matically becomes active again.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Re‐
set the system again.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces. The vehicle
is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop as needed.
your driving style to the driving circumstances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
tioned.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 343.
DSC, refer to page 212.
Steering system
Steering system may not be working.
154
Displays
CONTROLS
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Low beams
Low beams are switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, refer to
page 167.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up:
Lane departure warning
Emissions are deteriorating. Have the
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The indicator light lights up: the system
is activated. A lane marking was detected
on at least one side of the vehicle and
warnings can be issued.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive misfiring
in the engine.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 196.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐
tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious
engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐
ously damage emission control components,
in particular the catalytic converter.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off au‐
tomatically depending on the traffic sit‐
uation.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 369.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 169.
Green lights
Automatic Hold
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle
is automatically held in place when it is
stationary.
Safety belt reminder for rear seats
The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐
sponding rear seat.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 138.
Turn signal
Blue lights
High beams
Turn signal switched on.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
High beams are switched on.
High beams, refer to page 141.
Turn signal, refer to page 140.
Parking lights
Fuel gauge
Parking lights are switched on.
Concept
The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.
Parking lights/low beams, refer to
page 167.
155
Displays
CONTROLS
General information
Display
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
vary.
Information on refueling, refer to page 326.
Display
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed as
numerical value.
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the
tachometer.
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields
indicate an increase in the speed.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields
indicate the upcoming shift moment.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait
any further to shift.
When the maximum speed is reached, the entire
display flashes red and the supply of fuel is inter‐
rupted in order to protect the engine.
Tachometer
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to
protect the engine.
Standby state and drive-
ready state
Shift point indicator
The letters OFF in the tachome‐
ter indicate that drive-ready state
is switched off and standby state
is switched on.
Concept
The shift lights indicate the upshift point at which
the best possible acceleration can be achieved.
The letters READY in the tach‐
ometer indicate that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready to
start the engine automatically.
Functional requirement
Shift lights are shown when the SPORT driving
program is activated.
For further information, see Idle state, standby
state, and drive-ready state, refer to page 43.
Switching on/off
1. Select SPORT driving mode.
Press Driving Dynamics Control.
2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the trans‐
mission.
156
Displays
CONTROLS
Engine temperature
Range
Display
Concept
The range indicates the distance that can still be
covered with the current fuel level.
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine and
vehicle speeds.
General information
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
dle or in the lower half of the
temperature display.
The estimated range available with the remaining
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument
cluster.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
driving style, for instance fast cornering, the en‐
gine function is not always ensured.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the temperature range. In addition, a Check
Control message is displayed.
To check the coolant level, refer to page 366.
The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
Safety information
A red indicator light is displayed.
NOTICE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.
External temperature
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
Display
The current range is displayed as
numerical value next to the fuel
gauge.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
Service requirements
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There is
a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to
the weather conditions at low temperatures.
Concept
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
157
Displays
CONTROLS
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
General information
After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐
ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐
nance.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
A service advisor can read out the current serv‐
ice requirements from your remote control.
3.
"Service schedule"
4. "BMW Service"
5. "Date:"
Some information on service requirements can
also be shown on the BMW display key.
6. Select the desired setting.
Display
Automatic Service Request
Detailed information on service
requirements
More information on the type of service required
may be displayed on the Control Display.
Data regarding the service status or legally man‐
dated vehicle inspections is automatically trans‐
mitted to your dealer’s service center before your
vehicle is due for service.
Via iDrive:
You can check when your dealer’s service center
was notified.
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Vehicle status"
1. "CAR"
3.
"Service schedule"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Move the Controller to the left.
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed information.
4.
"TeleService Call"
Symbols
Gear shift indicator
Sym‐
bols
Description
Concept
No service is currently required.
The system recommends the most efficient gear
for the current driving situation.
The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
General information
Depending on the design and country version,
the gear shift indicator may be active in the
manual mode of the Steptronic transmission.
The service deadline has already
passed.
Steptronic transmission:
displaying
Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
158
Displays
CONTROLS
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐
gaged gear is displayed.
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Example
Description
Overview
Camera
Efficient gear is set.
Shift into efficient gear.
Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info
Concept
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed
limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary,
the Head-up Display.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
General information
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐
ment cluster or via iDrive.
The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐
tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well
as variable overhead sign posts.
Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐
nored depending on the situation in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
The system takes into account any information
that is stored in the navigation system and also
displays speed limits present on routes without
signs.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Driving"
Safety information
5. "Speed Limit Assistant"
6. "Info on speed limits"
7. "Show current limit"
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
159
Displays
CONTROLS
Display
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and may
provide incorrect information in the following sit‐
uations:
Speed Limit Info
Current speed limit.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed by
objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
Depending on the equipment,
Speed Limit Info not available.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,
the indicator light will flash.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits or road data stored in the
navigation system are incorrect.
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
▷ If the speed limits vary with the time of day
and the day of the week.
1. "CAR"
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Driving"
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such
as due to changes in road routing.
5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐
vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info
display in the instrument cluster and,
where applicable, the Head-up Display
when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐
ceeded. The warning that is issued when
a speed limit is exceeded may depend on
the Speed Limit Assist settings.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
▷ In the presence of country-specific signs and
road configurations.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit
that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is
displayed with a marking in the speedom‐
eter in the instrument cluster.
160
Displays
CONTROLS
Displaying and using the list
Selection lists
Button
Function
Concept
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for
certain functions in the instrument cluster or the
Head-up Display.
Change the entertainment
source.
Pressing the button again will
close the currently displayed
list.
▷ Entertainment source.
▷ Current audio source.
Show list of most recent tele‐
phone calls.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the Control Display.
Turn the thumbwheel to select
the desired setting.
Display
Press the thumbwheel to con‐
firm the setting.
The currently selected list can
be displayed again in the instru‐
ment cluster by turning the
thumbwheel.
Trip data
Depending on the equipment version, the list in
the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐
tration.
Concept
Values for the trip, such as the average con‐
sumption or trip miles, are displayed.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster.
The values can be displayed and reset depend‐
ing on various intervals, such as after refueling.
Display on the Control Display
Overview
The following information is displayed:
▷ Configured interval for resetting the trip data.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
161
Displays
CONTROLS
▷ Total time for shut off engine through the
Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐
hicle has come to a standstill.
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart.
▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐
cally reset after refueling with a larger
quantity of fuel.
Displays
Via iDrive:
▷ "Factory ( )": the values since the time of
the factory delivery are displayed.
1. "CAR"
▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last
manual reset are displayed. The values
can be reset at any time.
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
Resetting average values
manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time: "Individual ( )".
Consumption history
The average consumption is shown in the con‐
sumption history in form of a chart based on the
distance travelled and the driving mode.
With the button on the turn signal lever:
Display in the instrument cluster
1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐
nal lever until the widget for the trip data is
selected.
Information about the route can be displayed as
widget in the tachometer. Selecting and setting
widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 151.
The following information is displayed:
▷ Total mileage.
▷ Configured interval for resetting the trip data.
▷ Distance travelled depending on the config‐
ured interval.
▷ Average speed.
2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
Resetting trip data
The intervals in which the values must be reset
can be configured.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Trip data"
4. "Data since"
5. "Reset individual"
4. "Data since"
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automatically
set: "Individual ( )".
5. Select the desired setting:
162
Displays
CONTROLS
Opening the vehicle status
Via iDrive:
Sport displays
Concept
1. "CAR"
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
Display on the Control Display
Symbols
Description
Overview
"Flat Tire Monitor": status of the
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 350.
The following information is displayed:
▷ Boost pressure.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
▷ Acceleration power.
▷ Torque.
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐
fer to page 343.
▷ Power.
"Engine oil level": electronic oil
measurement, refer to
page 362.
Displays
Via iDrive:
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 153.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Sport displays"
"Service schedule": displaying
service requirements, refer to
page 157.
Display in the instrument cluster
"TeleService Call": Service Re‐
quest.
The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
two widgets in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 151.
The following widgets can be selected:
▷ Widget for torque and power.
▷ Widget for acceleration power.
Head-up Display
Concept
This system projects important information into
the driver's field of vision, for instance the speed.
Vehicle status
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
formed for several systems.
General information
Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up
Display, refer to page 383.
163
Displays
CONTROLS
4. "Head-up display"
Overview
5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Setting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
Via iDrive:
Switching on/off
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive:
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Brightness"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
7. Press the Controller.
When the low beams are switched on, the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be addi‐
tionally influenced using the instrument lighting.
Display
Overview
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
Adjusting the height
Via iDrive:
▷ Vehicle speed.
1. "CAR"
▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
▷ Sport displays.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
reached.
Some of this information is only displayed briefly
as needed.
7. Press the Controller.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Via iDrive:
The height of the Head-up Display can also be
stored using the memory function, refer to
page 122.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
164
Displays
CONTROLS
Setting the rotation
The Head-up Display view can be rotated.
Via iDrive:
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐
play is influenced by the following factors:
▷ Seat position.
1. "CAR"
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Rotation"
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic settings
checked by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
selected.
7. Press the Controller.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
Additional settings
Via iDrive:
The shape of the windshield makes it possible to
display a precise image.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
A film in the windshield prevents double images
from being generated.
3. "Displays"
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have
the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service center
or repair shop, if necessary.
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Speed Limit Assistant": access the set‐
tings for the speed assistant.
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the
selection lists are displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster or the Head-up Display.
▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and
Shift Lights in the Head-up Display.
▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐
played in the Head-up Display.
▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays
are only displayed in SPORT driving
mode.
▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐
tinuously displayed in the Head-up
Display.
▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐
tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐
formation can be displayed in the lower
section of the Head-up Display.
165
Lights
CONTROLS
Lights
Symbol Function
Automatic headlight control.
Vehicle features and
options
Adaptive light functions.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Lights and lighting
Switches in the vehicle
Automatic headlight
control
Concept
The low beams are switched on and off automat‐
ically depending on the ambient brightness, for
example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐
cipitation.
The light switch element is located next to the
steering wheel.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.
Symbol Function
Night Vision, refer to page 192.
Activating
Position of switch:
Lights off.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐
luminated when the low beams are switched on.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot serve as
a substitute for your personal judgment of light‐
ing conditions.
166
Lights
CONTROLS
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, switch
the lights on manually.
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on/off.
Left roadside parking light on/off.
Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
Welcome lights
General information
Position of switch:
,
,
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐
ing of the vehicle can be set individually.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Activating/deactivating
Parking lights
Position of switch:
,
Switching on
Via iDrive:
Position of switch:
1. "CAR"
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. Select the desired setting:
▷ "MGU-416756"
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐
ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and
it would then be impossible to switch on drive-
ready state.
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
light functions are switched on for a lim‐
ited time.
▷ "Door handle lights"
Low beams
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited
time.
Switching on
Position of switch:
▷ "Welcome Light Carpet"
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state
is switched on.
The area next to the vehicle is illuminated
for a limited time.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside
parking light can be switched on.
167
Lights
CONTROLS
LED light carpet
Activating/deactivating
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Daytime driving lights"
The light source is located in the position indi‐
cated.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Keep the light source clean and unobstructed.
Adaptive light functions
Headlight courtesy delay
feature
Concept
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐
tion of the roadway.
General information
The low beams stay lit for a certain time if the
high beams are switched on after standby state
is switched on.
General information
The adaptive light functions may consist of one
system or multiple systems, depending on the
equipment version:
Setting the duration
Via iDrive:
▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 168.
▷ Cornering light, refer to page 169.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Activating
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "Pathway lighting"
5. Select the desired setting.
Position of switch:
The adaptive light functions are active when the
drive-ready state is switched on.
Adaptive Light Control
Daytime running lights
General information
General information
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows the
course of the road.
Position of switch:
,
,
The daytime running lights light up when drive-
ready state is switched on. After drive-ready
state is switched off, the parking lights light up in
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Light Control does not swivel to the opposite
lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
position
.
168
Lights
CONTROLS
Activating
Cornering light
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched on
depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐
cable, the use of turn signals.
Position of switch:
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may
be automatically switched on regardless of the
steering angle.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The indicator light in the instrument clus‐
ter is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
Adaptive headlight range
control
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐
ances out acceleration and braking processes as
well as the vehicle load conditions in order to
avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Illumination of
the road is optimized.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster lights up when the system
switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when
manually switching the high beams on and off,
refer to page 141.
High-beam Assistant
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press the
button on the turn signal lever.
Concept
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically switches
the high beams on or off depending on the traffic
situation.
Deactivating
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic sit‐
uation allows. In the low speed range, the high
beams are not switched on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐
bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
169
Lights
CONTROLS
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; or at animal crossings.
Sensitivity of the high-beam
Assistant
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways.
General information
The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant can
be adjusted.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
Safety information
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐
ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be
momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident.
If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐
tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐
coming traffic is not momentarily blinded.
Laser high beams
Concept
The range of the high beams is increased and
ensures an even better illumination of the road.
Switch off the high beams manually if required.
General information
Adjusting the sensitivity
When the high beams are switched-on, starting
with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐
ser high beams in the headlight are automatically
switched on in addition to the LED high beams.
Pull the turn signal lever for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds. The system responds more
sensitively.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Depending on the country variant, further infor‐
mation can be obtained from the laser label on
the headlight.
Resetting the sensitivity
Pull the turn signal lever again for approx. 10 sec‐
onds. The sensitivity of the high-beam Assistant
is reset to the factory settings.
Safety information
System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
this, therefore switch off manually.
The system is not fully functional in the following
situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐
sary:
The label is in the headlight and is visible from
the outside.
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
170
Lights
CONTROLS
Switching the interior lights
on/off
Instrument lighting
Press the button.
Functional requirement
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness.
To switch off permanently: press the button and
hold for approx. 3 seconds.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
be switched on and off independently. The but‐
ton is located in the rear roofliner.
Adjusting
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Switching the reading lights
on/off
Press the button.
Interior lights
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐
ing lights are located next to the interior lights in
the front and rear.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐
ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐
trolled.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐
rior.
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Switching on/off
The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐
cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐
cle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it
will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
Via iDrive:
Interior lights
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Reading lights
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
171
Lights
CONTROLS
Selecting the color scheme
Via iDrive:
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond
Surround Sound System
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
General information
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Color"
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be
switched off.
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
Switching on/off
The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐
hicle is locked.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Via iDrive:
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Brightness"
1. "CAR"
5. Select the desired setting.
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
Dimmed while driving
Via iDrive:
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Setting the brightness
Via iDrive:
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
1. "CAR"
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
2. "Settings"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
5. "Brightness"
Panoramic glass sunroof,
lighting
6. Select the desired setting.
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the
sun protection is closed, the lighting in the area
concerned is switched off.
BMW Touch Command
The operation of the Bowers & Wilkins Diamond
Surround Sound System is also possible using
BMW Touch Command.
BMW Touch Command
The ambient light can also be operated using
BMW Touch Command.
172
Lights
CONTROLS
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Ambient highlight
General information
The ambient highlight illuminates the door pillars
in the rear.
Adjusting the brightness via
touch sensor
The ambient highlight is fitted with a touch sen‐
sor. The brightness is changed with a long touch
of the chrome bar.
When opening a rear door, the brightness of the
ambient highlight of the respective door pillar is
reduced. After the rear door is closed, the ambi‐
ent highlight is illuminated again in the previously
adjusted brightness.
BMW Touch Command
The ambient highlight can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.
Switching on/off automatically
The ambient highlight is switched on when the
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient accent lighting"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Switching on/off manually
The ambient highlight is fitted with a touch sen‐
sor. The ambient highlight is switched on or off
with a brief touch of the chrome bar.
Adjusting the brightness via
iDrive
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient accent lighting"
5. "Brightness"
The last brightness set is displayed.
6. Select the desired setting.
173
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
Airbags
1
2
3
Front airbag, driver
Front airbag, front passenger
Head airbag
4
5
Side airbag
Knee airbag
Front airbags
Side airbag
Front airbags help protect the driver and the
front passenger by responding to frontal impacts
in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate protection.
In the event of a side impact, the side airbag pro‐
tects the side of the body in the chest and lap
area.
174
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
Head airbag
In the event of a side impact, the head airbag
protects the head.
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐
mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐
son.
Ejection Mitigation
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐
senger side must stay clear - do not attach
adhesive labels or coverings and do not at‐
tach brackets or cables, for instance for GPS
devices or mobile phones.
The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐
tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the
likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side im‐
pact events.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the airbag
cover panels, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
Knee airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of
a frontal impact.
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
other objects to the front passenger seat that
are not specifically suited for seats with
integrated side airbags.
Protective effect
General information
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐
ets, over the backrests.
Information on optimum effect of the
airbags
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This
also applies to steering wheel covers, the
dashboard, and the seats.
Warning
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag
system cannot provide protection as intended
and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐
gering. There is a risk of injuries or danger to
life. Follow the information on achieving the op‐
timum protective effect of the airbag system.
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐
not be fully ruled out in certain situations.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐
ing impairment in sensitive occupants.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW
Customer Relations for further information.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as
possible when the airbag is triggered.
Warnings and information on the airbags are also
found on the sun visors.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting
correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in
the floor area and does not support them on
the dashboard.
175
Safety
CONTROLS
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as
a respective message appears on the Control
Display.
Functional readiness of the
airbag system
Safety information
Calibrating the front seats
Warning
Individual components can be hot after trigger‐
ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Do not touch individual components.
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐
ment.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional triggering of the
airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the
airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐
spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐
juries or danger to life. Have the airbag system
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrapped by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
A corresponding message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Press the switch and move the respective
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when the
message on the Control Display disappears.
Display in the instrument cluster
If the message continues to be displayed, repeat
the calibration.
When drive-ready state is switched on,
the warning light in the instrument clus‐
ter lights up briefly and thereby indicates
the function readiness of the entire airbag sys‐
tem and the belt tensioners.
If the message does not disappear after a repeat
calibration, have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Malfunction
Automatic deactivation of
the front-seat passenger
airbags
▷ Warning light does not come on
when drive-ready state is switched
on.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously.
Have the system checked.
Concept
The system reads if the front passenger seat is
occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐
ance.
Strength of the driver's and
front-seat passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/front-
seat passenger airbags very much depends on
the positions of the driver's/front passenger seat.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
176
Safety
CONTROLS
General information
Indicator light for the front-seat
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the roofliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
Before transporting a child on the front passen‐
ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
The light indicates whether the airbags are either
activated or deactivated.
Safety information
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
briefly lights up and then indicates whether the
airbags are either activated or deactivated.
Warning
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
function, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front passen‐
ger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the front pas‐
senger keeps his or her feet in the floor area.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint sys‐
tem or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not
activated.
▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for
instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐
cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐
bags on the front passenger side are acti‐
vated.
Malfunction of the automatic
deactivation system
When transporting older children and adults, the
front-seat passenger airbags may be deactivated
in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indi‐
cator light for the front-seat passenger airbags
lights up.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children seated in
a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐
straint systems required by NHTSA at the point
in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐
ter installing a child restraint system, make sure
that the indicator light for the front-seat passen‐
ger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child
restraint system has been detected and the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
In this case, change the sitting position so that
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
and the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat un‐
less they are specifically determined to be
safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Intelligent Safety
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
Concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the
driver assistance systems.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
could press against the seat from below.
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
177
Safety
CONTROLS
General information
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐
ligent Safety consists of one or more systems
that can help prevent an imminent collision.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
▷ Front collision mitigation, refer to page 179.
▷ Evasion assistance, refer to page 183.
▷ Intersection collision warning, refer to
page 185.
Overview
▷ Person warning with City braking function, re‐
fer to page 189.
Button in the vehicle
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
tection, refer to page 192.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 196.
▷ Blind spot collision warning, refer to
page 199.
▷ Side collision mitigation, refer to page 203.
Safety information
Warning
Intelligent Safety
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Button Status
Warning
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Press the button:
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
178
Safety
CONTROLS
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐
ings may vary with the current driving situation.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle in‐
tentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver
Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐
tures the driver’s field of vision. Additionally, the
system checks for visual impairments. Field of vi‐
sion and visibility also affect the timing of the
warnings.
Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐
ing settings are switched between:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
sub-functions, for instance setting for warning
time.
Safety information
Warning
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button:
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Front collision mitigation
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In the
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
pact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
ently, if needed.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem is controlled by the following sensors:
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
179
Safety
CONTROLS
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
Intelligent Safety
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
Camera
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
With radar sensor
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
180
Safety
CONTROLS
Prewarning
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
This warning is provided, for instance when there
is impending danger of a collision or the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Acute warning with braking function
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐
pending on the driving situation, the acute warn‐
ing may be accompanied by a brief activation of
the braking system.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Front collision mitigation"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐
tivation of the braking system is omitted.
If an acute warning is provided, the system may
also provide assistance, such as through braking,
when there is risk of collision.
▷ "Medium"
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
warning is active, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal
must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐
fully.
Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
nent.
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Symbol Measure
City brake function: the braking intervention oc‐
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
With radar sensor: the braking intervention oc‐
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the
braking intervention occurs as a brief braking
pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
181
Safety
CONTROLS
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐
low this speed, the system is reactivated.
System limits
Safety information
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
Detection range
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
The system's detection potential is limited.
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
182
Safety
CONTROLS
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
Overview
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Evasion assistance
Concept
The system supports the driver in making eva‐
sive maneuvers in certain situations, such as
when obstacles or persons suddenly appear.
General information
The system issues a warning and intervenes to
support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is
possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐
ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies
space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐
sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐
viding targeted steering support.
Front center bumper.
Front side bumper.
Rear bumper.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
183
Safety
CONTROLS
Camera
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for ob‐
stacles.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐
destrians.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Functional requirements
▷ Pedestrian warning with braking function, re‐
fer to page 189, is switched on.
Acute warning with evasion support
An acute warning is displayed when there is an
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle
approaching another object at a high speed.
▷ Front collision mitigation, refer to page 179, is
switched on.
▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
the vehicle.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The
system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐
ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision.
Switching on/off
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
System limits
Warning with evasion support
Display in the instrument cluster
Safety information
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
184
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Detection range
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Intersection collision
warning
The system's detection potential is limited.
Concept
Only objects that are detected by the system are
taken into account.
The system may prevent some accidents with
cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In the
event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐
pact speed.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The system sounds a warning in the city speed
range before an imminent collision and activates
brakes independently, if needed.
The following situations may not be detected, for
example:
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach
them at high speed.
General information
The system is controlled by the following sen‐
sors:
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
▷ Radar sensors on the side in the front
bumper.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ Radar sensor in the center in the front
bumper
At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐
sued when a danger of collision with crossing
traffic is detected.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds
above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The timing of
warnings may vary with the current driving situa‐
tion.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument
cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi‐
tionally, the system checks for visual impair‐
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect the
timing of the warnings.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
185
Safety
CONTROLS
Detection range
Overview
Vehicles that cross your direction of travel can be
detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐
cles enter into the detection range of the system.
Button in the vehicle
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Intelligent Safety
Camera
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the front
bumper.
Front side bumper.
186
Safety
CONTROLS
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Front center bumper.
Keep the radar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
Setting the warning time
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching on/off manually
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Front collision mitigation"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
The selected time is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Warning with braking function
Display
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐
ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐
nent.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
187
Safety
CONTROLS
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Sym‐
bol
Measure
The system may also assist in braking if there is
a risk of collision.
Danger of collision with vehicle
crossing from the right.
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.
Danger of collision with vehicle
crossing from the left.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
Danger of collision with vehicle for
which the direction of travel cannot
be determined.
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
Prewarning:
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning for
vehicles that cross your direction of
travel.
Intervene yourself, for instance by
braking.
System limits
Acute warning:
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning when
vehicles cross your direction of
travel.
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Prewarning
For example, a prewarning is displayed when a
danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐
tected.
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking
as warranted.
Upper speed limit
The system responds to crossing vehicles when
your own speed is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Acute warning with braking function
An acute warning is displayed in the event of an
immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐
hicle.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an
acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐
vide assistance, such as through braking, when
there is risk of collision.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
188
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Detection range
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, for
example the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐
cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐
actions.
The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
Person warning with City
braking function
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by
buildings, for instance.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you,
or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Concept
▷ Crossing bicycles.
The system may prevent some accidents involv‐
ing pedestrians and cyclists. In the event of an
accident, the system may reduce impact speed.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance.
The system sounds a warning in the city speed
range before an imminent collision and activates
brakes independently, if needed.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
General information
The system issues a warning of a possible risk of
collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐
ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists
who are within the detection range of the sys‐
tem.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐
tem is controlled by the following sensors:
▷ Camera in the area of the interior mirror.
▷ Radar sensor in the front bumper.
▷ If the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
189
Safety
CONTROLS
Detection range
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the
Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a
risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety
systems off prior to tow-starting/towing.
Overview
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
Button in the vehicle
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located
within the central area. A warning is issued about
pedestrians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of the
central area.
Intelligent Safety
Safety information
Camera
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Warning
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
190
Safety
CONTROLS
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
With radar sensor
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of
the front bumper.
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Switching on/off
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Warning with braking function
Display
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐
nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
The red symbol is displayed and a signal
sounds.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a
warning is active, the maximum braking force is
used when the brake is applied. This requires the
brake pedal to be depressed sufficiently quickly
and forcefully.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
If there is a risk of collision, the system may also
assist with braking.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the
vehicle may come to a complete stop.
191
Safety
CONTROLS
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance by
deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
32 in/80 cm.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
The driver may interrupt the braking intervention
function by stepping on the accelerator pedal or
by actively moving the steering wheel.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the
limitations of the system and actively intervene
as warranted.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐
activated, for instance DSC OFF.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
System limits
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
Safety information
Warning
▷ Depending on the equipment: if the radar
sensors are dirty or covered.
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Upper speed limit
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
when the speed of the vehicle is below approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited.
Night Vision with
pedestrian and animal
detection
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.
The following situations may not be detected, for
instance:
Concept
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐
cause of the viewing angle or contour.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of the
vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
192
Safety
CONTROLS
trians and animals on the street. The system de‐
tects warm objects that are similar in shape to
human beings or animals. If necessary, the ther‐
mal image can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Pedestrian and animal detection
General information
Thermal image
Object detection and warning only functions in
darkness.
Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐
ficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals
above a certain minimum size, for instance deer.
Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐
age activated:
The image shows the heat radiated by objects in
the field of view of the camera.
▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐
low.
Warm objects have a light appearance and cold
objects a dark appearance.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐
low.
The ability to detect an object depends on the
temperature difference between the object and
the background and on the level of heat radiation
emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in
temperature to the environment or that radiate
very little heat are difficult to detect.
Range of object detection, with good ambient
conditions:
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
330 ft/100 m.
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
490 ft/150 m.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient
light, the image is only displayed when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx.
230 ft/70 m.
Environmental influences can limit the availability
of object detection.
A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a
fraction of a second.
If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
located in a residential area, the animal detection
is temporarily switched off.
193
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Thermal image
Warning
Camera
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐
ternal temperatures are low.
Overview
When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the
camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals
when the windshield washer system, refer to
page 143, is activated.
Buttons in the vehicle
Switching on
Switching on automatically
When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐
cally active after every driving off.
Intelligent Safety
Switching on the thermal image
The thermal image from the Night Vision camera
can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐
tion to the warning function. This function has no
effect on object detection.
Press the button.
194
Safety
CONTROLS
The image from the camera is displayed on the
Control Display.
Warning area in front of the vehicle
Adjusting the thermal image
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when
the thermal image is switched on.
Via iDrive:
1. Select brightness or contrast:
▷
▷
"Brightness".
"Contrast".
The warning area for the person warning con‐
sists of two parts:
2. Set the desired value.
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
Warning function
Display
▷ Expanded area, arrows 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐
tween the central or expanded area.
Symbol
Meaning
Person warning.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed in‐
creases, the area becomes, for instance longer
and wider.
Animal warning.
Prewarning.
Symbol lights up red.
Prewarning
Symbol flashes red and a sig‐ Acute warning.
nal sounds.
Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐
son is detected in the central area immediately in
front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right
side in the extended area.
The displayed symbol may vary and shows the
side of the road on which the person or animal
was detected.
Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐
mal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or
making an evasive maneuver.
Warning of people or animals in
danger
If a collision with a person or an animal detected
in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐
pears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-
up Display.
Acute warning
Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐
mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the
vehicle.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out.
If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an
evasive maneuver immediately.
195
Safety
CONTROLS
Display in the Head-up Display
The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster.
Lane departure warning
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐
cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.
System limits
Basic limits
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
General information
This camera-based system warns starting at a
minimum speed.
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight
curves.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
▷ If the camera is soiled or damaged.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ At very high external temperatures.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
Limits of pedestrian and animal
detection
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians
are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐
trians.
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a
lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the
vehicle in the lane.
Small animals are not detected by the object de‐
tection function, even if they are clearly visible in
the image.
Safety information
Limited detection, for instance in the following
circumstances:
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially
covered, especially when their heads are cov‐
ered.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing road
and traffic safety. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐
sponse to a warning.
▷ People who are not in an upright position, for
instance lying down.
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐
cumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐
stance after an accident.
Warning
No display on the rear screen
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐
played on the rear screen.
196
Safety
CONTROLS
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
Functional requirements
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the lane departure warning to be active.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
Intelligent Safety
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Camera
Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The lane departure warning activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.
197
Safety
CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
Setting the warning time
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
6. "Steering intervention"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
▷ "Medium"
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐
pressed depending on the situation,
for instance during passing without a turn
signal or when purposely driving over lane
markings in curves.
The symbol illuminates green: at lane
marking was detected on at least one
side of the vehicle and warnings can be
issued.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
Warning function
If you leave the lane
The selected setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Via iDrive:
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐
cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐
ting.
1. "CAR"
If the turn signal is switched on before a lane
change, a warning is not issued.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
Steering intervention
If in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a
lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes
with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐
tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps
keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐
vention can be noticed on the steering wheel
and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐
ing an active steering intervention, the display in
the instrument cluster will blink.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Switching steering intervention
on/off
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for blind spot collision warning
and lane departure warning.
Warning signal
In the event of multiple active steering interven‐
tions by the system within 3 minutes without the
driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning sig‐
198
Safety
CONTROLS
nal will sound at the second steering interven‐
tion. Beginning with the third steering interven‐
tion, an continuous warning will sound.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
The warning signal and Check-Control message
are an encouragement to pay closer attention to
the lane.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
End of warning
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is not fully functional.
System limits
Safety information
Blind spot collision warning
Warning
Concept
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Blind spot collision warning detects vehicles in
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐
hind in the adjacent lane. A warning is issued in
various gradations in these situations.
General information
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle when
traveling faster than a minimum speed.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
199
Safety
CONTROLS
The minimum speed is shown in the menu for
the intelligent Safety systems.
Overview
The system indicates whether there are vehicles
in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
Button in the vehicle
The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐
tions described above.
The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds
of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can in‐
tervene with a brief active steering intervention
and help guide the vehicle back into the lane.
The steering intervention occurs when a mini‐
mum speed is reached. This minimum speed is
displayed on the Control Display in the menu for
the steering intervention, refer to page 201.
Intelligent Safety
Radar sensors
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
Warning
Switching on automatically
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Blind spot collision warning is automatically acti‐
vated after departure if the function was
switched on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
200
Safety
CONTROLS
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
5. "Blind spot collision warning"
6. Select the desired setting.
▷ "Early"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late"
▷ "Off": with this setting, no warning is out‐
put.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Via iDrive:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status
Vehicles with side collision
mitigation: switching steering
intervention on/off
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for blind spot collision warning
and lane departure warning.
Via iDrive:
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Setting the warning time
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Blind spot collision warning"
6. "Steering intervention"
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Safety and warnings"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
201
Safety
CONTROLS
Warning function
System limits
Light in the exterior mirror
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Prewarning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐
proaching from behind.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
Acute warning
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐
sponds according to the setting.
If the turn signal is switched on while a vehicle is
in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates
briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes
brightly.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area or after deactivation of the
turn signal.
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
Vehicles with side collision
mitigation
If there is no response to the vibration of the
steering wheel at speeds of up to
130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active
steering intervention. The steering intervention
helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐
ing intervention can be noticed on the steering
wheel and can be manually overridden at any
time.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the
steering intervention can be limited, for instance
in the following situation:
Flashing of the light
A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
serves as system self-test.
202
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
General information
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ When lane markings are not white.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
space next to the vehicle from a minimum speed
of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
The front camera determines the lane marking
positions.
If, for instance another vehicle is detected next to
the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with
this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision.
For this purpose, the system issues a warning
with a flashing LED in the exterior mirror and a vi‐
brating steering wheel. If necessary, the system
will carry out an active steering intervention.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
Displaying warnings
Safety information
Depending on the selected warning settings, for
instance warning time, more warnings can be
displayed. However, there may also be an excess
of premature warnings of critical situations.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Side collision mitigation
Concept
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
sions.
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
203
Safety
CONTROLS
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Functional requirements
The camera must detect the lane markings for
the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐
vention to be active.
Rear bumper.
Overview
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Button in the vehicle
Camera
Intelligent Safety
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The side collision mitigation activates automati‐
cally after departure if the function was switched
on at the end of the last trip.
Switching on/off manually
Front bumper.
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tem is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off,
all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
204
Safety
CONTROLS
tems can be individually configured. The individ‐
ual settings are activated and stored for the
driver profile currently used. As soon as a setting
is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems and stored for the driver profile currently
used.
Warning function
Press the button repeatedly.
Light in the exterior mirror
The following settings are switched be‐
tween:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐
vidually switched off.
Press and hold this button.
Acute warning
All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐
rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐
brates. A Check Control message is displayed at
the same time.
Button Status
If necessary, an active steering intervention then
takes place to prevent collisions and maintain the
vehicle within its own lane.
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐
gent Safety systems are switched off
or currently unavailable.
The steering intervention can be noticed on the
steering wheel and can be manually overridden
at any time.
Button does not light up: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched off.
System limits
Safety information
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Warning
Via iDrive:
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. "Vibration intensity"
6. Select the desired setting.
205
Safety
CONTROLS
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Rear collision preparation
Concept
The system reacts to vehicles approaching from
behind.
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
General information
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings
such as in construction areas.
▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice,
dirt or water.
▷ When lane markings are covered by objects.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front
of you.
If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a certain
speed, the system responds as follows:
▷ If there are constant blinding effects because
of oncoming light, for instance from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ Active Protection, refer to page 208: if a colli‐
sion seems to be unavoidable, PreCrash
functions are triggered.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
shield is dirty or covered in the area of the in‐
terior mirror.
Safety information
▷ If the camera has overheated and been tem‐
porarily switched off due to excessively high
temperatures.
Warning
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine
via the Start/Stop button.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
Attaching any objects such as stickers or film in
the beam area of the radar sensors will also im‐
pact the function of the radar sensors and may
even cause them to fail.
Warning
A Check Control message is displayed when the
system is not fully functional.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐
stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due
to its limits, the system may not issue warnings
or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a
manner that is not consistent with their normal
use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
206
Safety
CONTROLS
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Emergency Stop Assistant
Concept
If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the system
helps to safely bring the vehicle to a standstill.
Overview
Radar sensors
General information
The emergency stop function is not triggered
automatically. The emergency stop function can
only be triggered manually by the occupants.
When the system is activated, the vehicle is
brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
lane guidance.
Depending on the equipment version and na‐
tional market version, the system includes a lane
change function.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
With lane change function: On motorways or mo‐
torway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle
to the side of the road or shoulder where possi‐
ble. On other roads or under high traffic condi‐
tions, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on the
actual road.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on/off
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Overview
The system is deactivated in the following situa‐
tions:
▷ When driving in reverse.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ When the approaching vehicle approaches
slowly.
Parking brake
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
Functional requirements
▷ The function can be activated at speeds of
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx.
155 mph/250 km/h.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
207
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ Lane changes are executed at speeds of ap‐
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h up to approx.
62 mph/100 km/h.
▷ Parking brake is set.
▷ Interior lights are switched on.
▷ Central locking system is unlocked.
Activating the emergency stop
function
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly
to activate the emergency stop function.
Symbol Status
▷ With lane change function: Releasing the
switch may trigger an automatic lane change.
Emergency Stop function active.
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for
a maximum of 2 minutes.
System limits
Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐
ure.
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
▷ An Emergency Request is triggered.
The system cannot replace the driving perform‐
ance of a driver who is fit to drive.
Canceling the emergency stop
function
The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐
tion by actively taking control of the vehicle
throughout the entire process.
Active Protection
For instance, the emergency stop function will
be canceled in the following situations:
Concept
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or
collision situations.
▷ When steering.
▷ When using the turn signal.
▷ During acceleration.
General information
Active Protection consists of various PreCrash
functions, which can vary depending on the
equipment.
▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request.
▷ When switching the selector lever position at
standstill.
The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐
ing situations that might lead to an accident. This
includes the following critical driving situations:
▷ When the driver's foot remains on the accel‐
erator pedal after the function has been trig‐
gered.
▷ Emergency stop.
▷ Severe understeering.
▷ Severe oversteering.
▷ When the switch of the parking brake is
pressed.
Certain functions of several systems can - within
the system limits - lead to Active Protection trig‐
gering:
At standstill
As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system
will carry out the following settings:
▷ Front collision mitigation: automatic brake in‐
tervention.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
208
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant.
ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
safety belt before continuing on your trip.
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐
tection: Brake Assistant.
All other systems can be restored to the desired
setting.
▷ Rear collision preparation: detection of immi‐
nent rear collisions.
PostCrash – iBrake
Safety information
Concept
Warning
In the event of an accident, the system can bring
the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐
vention by the driver in certain situations. This
can reduce the risk of a further collision and the
consequences thereof.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, critical situation could not be detected
reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐
matically.
Function
When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and
passenger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
ened once after driving away.
Harder vehicle braking
In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring
the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake
Assistant allows.
In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐
vidual functions become active as needed:
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake.
For a brief period, the braking pressure will be
higher than the braking pressure that is achieved
by the automatic braking function. Automatic
braking is interrupted.
▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety
belts.
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
gap.
▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐
cluding sun protection.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐
ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐
sive maneuver.
▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass
sunroof, including sun protection.
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in
the front: automatic positioning of the back‐
rest for the front passenger seat.
Interrupt automatic braking:
▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort rear
seats: automatic positioning of the backrests
for the rear passenger seats.
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐
dent, the front safety belts are loosened again.
If the belt tension does not loosen automatically,
stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐
209
Safety
CONTROLS
Break recommendation
Adjusting
The fatigue alert is active automatically with each
switching on of drive-ready state and can thus
display a break recommendation.
Fatigue alert
General information
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
trips, for instance on highways. In this situation, it
is recommended that the driver takes a break.
The break recommendation can also be
switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
Via iDrive:
Safety information
1. "CAR"
Warning
2. "Settings"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's
physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or
fatigue may not be detected or not be detected
in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure
that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions.
3. "General settings"
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is
made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is
issued earlier.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is made.
Function
The system is switched on each time drive-ready
state is switched on.
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display with
the recommendation to take a break.
After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐
tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐
creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected.
During the display, various settings can be se‐
lected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
After a break, another recommendation to take a
break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of
trip.
System limits
▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of
the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐
era.
The function may be limited in the following sit‐
uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no
warning at all:
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system
is active and can also display a recommendation
to take a break.
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
210
Safety
CONTROLS
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a
break during longer trips on highways.
211
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and
options
Adaptive brake assistant
In combination with Active Cruise Control, this
system ensures that the brakes respond even
more rapidly when braking in critical situations.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill grades.
Driving off
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
Anti-lock Braking System
ABS
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during brak‐
ing.
Depending on the vehicle loading or when a
trailer is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
The vehicle maintains its steering power even
during full brake applications, thus increasing ac‐
tive safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
gine.
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control
Brake assistant
Concept
Within the physical limits, the system helps to
keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
engine speed and by braking the individual
wheels.
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically boosts the vehicle braking capabil‐
ity to the furthest possible extent. It reduces the
braking distance to a minimum during an emer‐
gency stop. This system utilizes all of the capa‐
bilities provided by the Antilock Brake System
ABS.
General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
ditions, for instance:
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
212
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Safety information
Deactivating/activating DSC
General information
Warning
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐
duced during acceleration and when driving in
curves.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Deactivating DSC
Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
displayed in the instrument cluster and
the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance with
roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐
ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk
of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐
tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Do not deactivate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control when driving with
roof load.
Activating DSC
Press the button.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
Display
In the instrument cluster
Overview
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
Button in the vehicle
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
The indicator light flashes: DSC controls
the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DSC OFF
213
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating DTC
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control
Activating DTC
Press the button.
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
Control where forward momentum is optimized.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
The system ensures maximum headway on spe‐
cial road conditions or loose road surfaces, for in‐
stance unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
what limited driving stability.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
General information
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Display
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in
the following situations:
Display in the instrument cluster
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-
covered roads.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐
vated.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Overview
Automatic program change
Button in the vehicle
In certain situations, the DSC is activated auto‐
matically:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ On a braking intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
xDrive
DSC OFF
Concept
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐
cle. The interaction of xDrive and other suspen‐
sion control systems, such as DSC Dynamic Sta‐
bility Control, further optimizes traction and
214
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
driving dynamics. xDrive variably distributes the
driving forces to the front and rear axles as de‐
manded by the driving situation and road surface.
Using snow chains
In order to guarantee free running of the wheels
when operating with snow chains, rear axle
steering of the integral active steering must be
switched off when snow chains are mounted.
Integral Active Steering
Set operation with snow chains, refer to
page 343.
Concept
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐
neuverability and makes a more direct steering
response possible.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel
must be turned further, while the vehicle re‐
sponds more sensitively to steering wheel move‐
ments in the higher speed range.
General information
Integral Active Steering is a combination of varia‐
ble steering ratio and rear axle steering.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐
activated.
The variable steering ratio amplifies the steering
angle when maneuvering, thus making the steer‐
ing more direct. The rear axle steering acts to in‐
crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning
the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction
to the front wheels.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels. This re‐
sults in, for instance better directional stability
and a more harmonious change of direction.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐
steering.
Tuning
The system offers several different tunings.
Driving mode
Integral Active Steering
COMFORT
ECO PRO
comfortable, for optimal
travel comfort
SPORT
dynamic, for greater agility
The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol, refer to page 135.
215
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
Overview
Vehicle features and
options
Buttons on the steering wheel
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Button Function
System on/off, refer to page 216.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assist, refer to
page 228: take over suggested
speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit, refer to
page 217.
Manual Speed Limiter
Concept
The system can be used to set a speed limit, for
instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding
speed limits.
Operation
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
General information
The system can limit the speed, starting at a
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be
driven at any speed below the set speed limit.
The current speed is accepted as the speed
limit.
If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
stationary or driving at low speeds,
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the re‐
spective speed.
When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving
mode may be switched on as well.
Switching off
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The system switches off automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations, for example:
▷ When the engine is switched off.
216
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ When cruise control is switched on.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
There is no warning in this case.
▷ When certain programs are activated via the
Driving Dynamics Control.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to
intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
The displays go out.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set
speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated.
Interrupting
If the reverse gear is engaged or idle, the system
is interrupted.
Warning when the speed limit is
exceeded
Changing the speed limit
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐
tor light in the instrument cluster flashes
while the vehicle speed is greater than
the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally,
a signal sounds.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set.
▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the ve‐
hicle speed while driving, the signal sounds
after some time.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the speed limit increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ If the speed limit is intentionally exceeded by
stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way
down, there is no signal.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally
exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐
hicle is not actively braked.
Display in the speedometer
If the speed limit is set during a trip to a value be‐
low the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it
drops to the set speed limit.
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted.
The current speed can also be stored by press‐
ing a button:
▷ No marking: system is
switched off.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Exceeding the speed limit
Indicator light
If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit,
a warning is issued.
▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐
tem is switched on.
217
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit
has been exceeded.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐
age to property. Only use the system if driving
at constant speed is possible.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐
terrupted.
Warning
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Cruise control
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
General information
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode.
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 218.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 220.
Safety information
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 219.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assist, refer to
page 228: take over suggested
speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 219.
Switching cruise control on/off
Warning
Switching on
The use of the system can lead to an increased
risk of accidents in the following situations,
for instance:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
▷ On winding roads.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
218
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
Switching off
The stored speed is displayed, refer to
page 220, on the speedometer.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Pausing cruise control
Press the button.
Interrupting manually
Changing the speed
When active, press the button.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
▷ When SPORT PLUS is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
Setting the speed
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the desired speed increases
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining and storing the speed
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it accelerates or deceler‐
ates the vehicle without requiring pressure on
the accelerator pedal.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
219
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Continuing cruise control
System limits
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
Press the button with the system inter‐
rupted.
Active Cruise Control with
Stop & Go function ACC
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues.
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
Concept
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using
the buttons on the steering wheel.
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
The system maintains the desired speed on
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle acceler‐
ates or brakes automatically.
Display in the speedometer
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The
speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐
lows.
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
desired speed.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
General information
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper and
a camera on the interior mirror to detect vehicles
driving ahead of you.
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator light
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain condi‐
tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐
pending on the driving mode.
▷ Indicator light green: system is active.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respective
speed.
▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief period,
the system is able to detect this within the given
system limits.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
220
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
Safety information
▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Warning
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing.
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 222.
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
Select function.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
curb.
or
Cruise control on/off, refer to
page 222.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assist, refer to
page 228: take over suggested
speed manually.
Warning
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 223.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 224.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
Warning
Continue cruise control with the last
setting, refer to page 224.
Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐
ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐
ing situations:
221
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
Button Function
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant:
Area of application
The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 223.
Increase the distance, refer to
page 224.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
Switch distance control on/off.
The maximum speed that can be set is
115 mph/180 km/h.
Reduce distance, refer to page 224.
Switch distance control on/off.
The system can also be activated when station‐
ary.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to page 224.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
Radar sensor
With steering and traffic jam
assistant: Assisted Driving
General information
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
The button can be used to set the pri‐
marily used function.
The radar sensor is located in the front bumper.
Set function
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed.
1.
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired function is
selected in the function bar. The function bar
for Assisted Driving is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
Camera
▷
Cruise control with distance con‐
trol.
▷
Cruise control with distance con‐
trol and steering and traffic jam assistant.
The selected function is shown in green.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
222
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant.
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
Switching on
With steering and traffic jam assistant:
If interrupting the system while stationary, press
on the brake pedal at the same time.
1.
Press the button on the steering
If necessary, set the cruise control.
wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
2.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant:
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
Depending on the equipment, press the
relevant button on the steering wheel.
▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light
up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the
current speed.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's
door is opened while the vehicle is standing
still.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for an
extended period, for instance on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step on
brake pedal at the same time.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired,
for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐
hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐
tem.
Press the following button on the steering wheel
again:
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant. Depending on the equipment,
press the relevant button.
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed is
deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the following button on the
steering wheel:
223
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
Setting the speed
resistance point, the desired speed increases
or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining and storing the speed
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐
tivated.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system
limits, braking can be late. There may be a risk
of accident or risk of damage to property. Be
aware to the traffic situation at all times. Adjust
the distance to the traffic and weather condi‐
tions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐
tance, possibly by braking.
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
eter.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if
necessary.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐
ton.
Reduce distance
Press the button.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Changing the speed
Instrument cluster will display selected distance,
refer to page 225.
Increase the distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected distance,
refer to page 225.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
Continuing cruise control
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road
is clear.
Make sure that the difference between current
speed and stored speed is not too large before
224
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐
tional braking or accelerating may occur.
With steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on
distance control:
Press the following button on the steering wheel
with the system interrupted:
Press the button.
After switching, a Check Control message is dis‐
played.
Without steering and traffic jam assis‐
tant.
With steering and traffic jam assistant.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐
ues.
Display in the speedometer
In the following cases, the stored speed value is
deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ Green marking: system is ac‐
tive, the marking indicates the
desired speed.
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐
rupted, the marking indicates
the stored speed.
Changing between cruise control
with/without distance control
▷ No marking: system is switched off.
Safety information
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is
shown.
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driving
ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored
speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Adjust the desired
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed.
Symbol
Description
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Switch mode of the cruise control
Switching cruise control without distance control
off and on:
▷
Press and hold this button.
▷
Press and hold this button.
Without steering and traffic jam assistant: switch
on distance control:
▷
▷
Press the button.
Press the button.
225
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Indicator/warning lights
Symbol
Description
Distance 4
Symbol
Description
This value is set automatically
after the system is switched on.
Indicator light green: system is
active.
No indicator light: system is
switched off.
System interrupted.
Vehicle symbol flashes:
The conditions are not adequate
for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but
applies the brakes until you ac‐
tively resume control by press‐
ing on the brake pedal or accel‐
erator pedal.
No distance control display, as
the accelerator pedal is being
pressed.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars flash red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
Detected vehicle
Symbol
Description
Brake and make an evasive ma‐
neuver, if necessary.
Green symbol:
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you.
Displays in the Head-up Display
Desired speed
Some system information can also be displayed
in the Head-up Display.
The system maintains the set distance to the ve‐
hicle in front.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed is reached.
As soon as the detected vehicle drives off, the
vehicle symbol in the distance indicator will move
away.
Distance information
To accelerate, activate ACC, for instance by
briefly stepping on the accelerator pedal or
pressing the rocker switch.
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is
too short.
The distance information is active in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, refer
to page 163.
▷ Distance too short.
226
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.
System limits
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
swerves into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system re‐
quests that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
Detection range
Cornering
The detection capacity of the system and the
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be
detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road
users.
▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐
tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle
driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late.
▷ For oncoming traffic.
Swerving vehicles
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the
bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you
may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
until it is completely within the same lane as your
vehicle.
227
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently.
Malfunction
Radar sensor
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐
sor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused
by damage incurred, for instance during parking.
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐
tem fails.
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
Weather
The system may be impaired when the detection
range of the radar sensor is partially covered
such as by the license plate holder.
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
Camera
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
The function for detecting and responding when
approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in
the following situations:
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
▷ During calibration of the camera immediately
after vehicle delivery.
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
Check Control message is displayed.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
Speed Limit Assist
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Concept
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit
along the route, this new speed value can be ap‐
plied for the following systems:
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill.
The speed may not be maintained on uphill
grades if the engine power is insufficient.
▷ Manual Speed Limiter.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill
grades.
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function.
The speed value is suggested as the new de‐
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti‐
vated.
228
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limit
can be applied manually.
Safety information
▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐
its are displayed in the instrument cluster
without being applied.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist will be switched
off.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
A message is indicated in the instrument cluster
when the system and cruise control are acti‐
vated.
Warning
Symbol
Function
The desired speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Adjust the desired speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Indicator light illuminates green, to‐
gether with the symbol for a cruise
control system:
Speed Limit Assist is active and
detected speed limits can be ap‐
plied manually for the displayed
system.
Overview
Detected change of a speed limit
with immediate effect.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Indicator light illuminates green:
the detected speed limit can be
applied with the SET button.
Apply suggested speed manually.
As soon as the speed limit has
been applied, a green checkmark
is displayed.
Rocker switch:
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
Switching on/off and adjusting
Via iDrive:
Apply detected speed limit
manually
A detected speed limit can be applied to cruise
control manually.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Driving"
As soon as the SET icon lights up,
press the button.
5. "Speed Limit Assistant"
6. "Info on speed limits"
Select the desired setting:
System limits
Speed Limit Assist is based on the Speed Limit
Info system.
229
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info,
refer to page 160.
Overview
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for
the Active Cruise Control.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
The system may not respond to top speed limi‐
tations when the navigation system is unable to
clearly identify the position of the vehicle.
Steering and traffic jam assistant on/
off, refer to page 231.
Switch function on, refer to
page 231.
Steering and traffic jam
assistant
Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Concept
The system assists the driver in keeping the ve‐
hicle within the lane. For this purpose, the sys‐
tem executes supporting steering movements,
for instance when driving in a curve.
General information
The system determines the position of the lane
markings and the vehicle driving ahead using five
radar sensors and a camera.
Front center bumper.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
self according to the lane markings or vehicles in
front.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Front side bumper.
230
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened.
Additionally, the following systems must be ac‐
tive:
▷ Approach control warning.
▷ Person warning.
▷ Side collision mitigation.
Switching on/off
Assisted Driving
General information
Rear bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
This button is used to switch the config‐
ured function on and off.
Camera
The button can be used to set the pri‐
marily used function.
Set function
1.
When the system is active, press the
button repeatedly until the desired function is
selected in the function bar. The function bar
for Assisted Driving is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mirror
clean and clear.
▷
▷
Cruise control with distance con‐
Functional requirements
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
trol.
Cruise control with distance con‐
trol and steering and traffic jam assistant.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐
ing is detected.
The selected function is shown in green.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking
or a vehicle driving ahead is detected.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
▷ Wide curves.
Switching on
▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
▷ Turn signal switched off.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
2.
Adjust the steering and traffic jam
assistant if necessary.
▷ Cruise control with distance control is active.
231
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 231.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
System activates automatically as soon as all
function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 231.
Displays in the instrument
cluster
Symbol
Description
Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The system is active.
Gray steering wheel symbol:
The system is on standby.
With the system switched on, the person warn‐
ing with City braking function and the side colli‐
sion mitigation are active.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated.
Switching off
Yellow flashing steering wheel
symbol:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Lane marking driven over.
The indicator goes out.
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
The system does not perform supportive steer‐
ing wheel movements.
Yellow steering wheel symbol
and a signal sounds, if applica‐
ble:
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
System interruption is imminent.
Steering wheel symbol flashes
red, signal sounds:
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ When you leave your own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
System is switching off.
Green steering wheel symbol
and lane marking symbol:
The system supports the driver
in keeping the vehicle within the
lane.
▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is de‐
tected and there is no vehicle driving in front.
▷ If Active Cruise Control is interrupted.
▷ If the safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐
tened.
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
manipulate steering.
232
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
Symbol
Description
The steering wheel displays can be switched
on/off if required.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. The system is
still active.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Red steering wheel symbol and
a signal sounds:
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Feedback on the steering wheel"
5. "Light elements"
6. Make the desired setting.
The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. System interrup‐
tion is imminent.
The system reduces the speed
to a standstill if applicable.
Displays in the Head-up Display
All system information can also be displayed in
the Head-up Display.
It is possible that the system will
not execute any supporting
steering movements.
Lane change assistant
Concept
Indicator
light
Description
The system additionally supports the driver when
changing lanes on multilane roads.
Cruise control with distance
control and steering and traffic
jam assistant:
Functional requirements
Indicator light green: system is
active.
▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled, refer to
page 231.
No indicator light: system is
switched off.
▷ Depending on country specifications: driving
on a road without pedestrians or cyclists and
with physical barriers to oncoming traffic,
such as crash barriers.
Displays on the steering wheel
▷ Lane markings have been detected.
▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h.
▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.
Switching the function on/off
The lane change assistant can be switched on/
off.
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate
analogously to the displays in the instrument
cluster:
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
233
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Driving"
Displays in the instrument cluster
Symbol
Description
5. "Steering Assistant"
6. "Automatic Lane Change"
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
Changing lanes
1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
changing lanes.
Green arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
2. Press the turn indicator lever, refer to
page 140, in the required direction to the
pressure point for signaling briefly and hold it
there.
The system carries out a lane
change.
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
Steering support in the required direction can
be detected a short time later.
No arrow symbol for lane-
changing on the display.
The system detected the lane
change request. Lane change
not currently possible.
Depending on country specifica‐
tions:
Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the
appropriate side.
After the lane change, the system helps keep the
vehicle in the new lane.
Gray arrow symbol for lane-
changing.
Canceling a lane change
If the turn signal lever is released too soon, the
system helps the driver keep to the original lane.
Lane change not possible; func‐
tional requirements not met.
Assisted Driving Plus
Concept
Assisted Driving Plus supports the driver with ve‐
hicle control in traffic jam situations.
Steering support takes place without the driver
actively steering.
234
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Select Assistant Driving Plus with the
button on the steering wheel.
Safety information
The symbol for Assisted Driving Plus is shown in
green.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over
steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Two green LED lights, refer to page 235, are il‐
luminated on the steering wheel.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
shown in green.
The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐
cle control.
Displays in the instrument cluster
State laws differ and the use of this function may
violate the law. Before use, check your state and
local laws.
Indicator
light
Description
Indicator light green: system is
active.
Functional requirements
▷ The functional requirements of the steering
and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled, refer to
page 231.
Displays on the steering wheel
▷ The steering and traffic jam assistant is ac‐
tive.
▷ The function is only available on certain street
types, e.g. freeways.
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐
clists.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead
are detected.
The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate
analogously to the displays in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐
ment cluster detects that the driver is paying
attention to the traffic.
▷ Green: the system is active.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
Switching on
System limits
As soon as all functional requirements
are met, Assisted Driving Plus will be dis‐
played as an additional symbol in the
function bar. The toolbar is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster.
General information
The system cannot be activated or meaningfully
used in certain situations.
235
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐
stance by braking, steering or evading.
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
Driver Attention Camera
Always monitor the traffic conditions.
The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or
not the driver is paying attention to the traffic
conditions.
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
functional in the following situations:
▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered
by the steering wheel rim.
Hands on the steering wheel
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel
contact in the following situations:
▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐
able sunglasses.
▷ Driving with gloves.
PDC Park Distance Control
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel.
Narrow lanes
Concept
When driving within narrow lanes, the system
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐
stance in the following situations:
PDC is a support when parking. Objects that you
are approaching slowly in front of or behind the
vehicle are indicated by signal tones and a dis‐
play on the Control Display.
▷ In construction areas.
▷ In rescue lanes.
Depending on the equipment version: obstacles
at the side of the vehicle that are detected by the
side ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by
the side protection, refer to page 239, function.
▷ Within city limits.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐
orable weather or light conditions:
General information
The ultrasound sensors for distance measure‐
ments are located in the bumpers and possibly
on the sides of the vehicle.
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐
ings.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are
already recognized.
The range, depending on obstacles and environ‐
mental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light condi‐
tions:
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
▷ Wet conditions.
▷ Snowfall.
▷ Slush.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐
ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ Fog.
▷ Glare.
236
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Ultrasound sensors
Safety information
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
for instance in the bumpers.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
Functional requirements
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers, bicycle racks.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Warning
Switching on/off
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de‐
layed due to physical circumstances. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Switching on automatically
The system switches on automatically in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when
the engine is running.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while
approaching detected obstacles if the speed
is slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The
activation distance depends on the situation
in question.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
You may switch automatic activation when ob‐
stacles are detected on and off.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. Where applicable: "Automatic PDC
activation"
Park assistance button
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on equipment, an additional camera
view is also switched on.
237
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
1. "CAR"
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Volume PDC signal"
6. Set the desired value.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Switching on/off manually
Press the park assistance button.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Visual warning
The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐
verse gear is engaged when pressing the park
assistance button.
Warning
Signal tones
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. For instance, if an ob‐
ject is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a
signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Control
Display before a signal sounds.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are
detected.
If the distance to a detected object is less than
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
of the required space.
If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐
hicle at the same time, with a distance smaller
than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternating constant
tone will sound.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
different view with obstacle markings as needed:
The intermittent tone and constant tone are
switched off if the selector lever position P is en‐
gaged.
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. For instance "Park. sensors only"
The intermittent tone is switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 261: de‐
pending on the equipment, it is warned in the
PDC display against vehicles approaching in the
front or rear from the side.
Volume
The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted.
238
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating the system
Via iDrive:
Depending on the equipment
version: emergency brake
function, Active PDC
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Concept
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
The emergency braking function of PDC initiates
an emergency braking in case of acute risk of
collision.
5. If necessary, "Active PDC with braking
interv."
General information
6. "Active PDC with braking interv."
This function may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on the equipment
version: side protection
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐
vented under all circumstances.
Concept
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the
braking intervention.
General information
After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐
ing toward an obstacle is possible. To creep to‐
ward the obstacle, lightly press the accelerator
pedal and release it again.
This function may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed, the
vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking is pos‐
sible at any time.
In addition to the front and rear ultrasonic sen‐
sors, the system uses the side ultrasonic sen‐
sors.
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of PDC
and parking assistant.
Display
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
cle.
239
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
stacles.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the
vehicle was not yet captured.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the
markings are shown in black after a certain time.
The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐
tured.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
System limits
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
Safety information
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
False warnings
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no obsta‐
cle within the detection range:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered with
ice.
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
240
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
Overview
smooth walls, for instance in underground ga‐
rages.
Depending on the vehicle
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
equipment: button in the vehicle
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for instance
sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
To prevent false alarms, switch off automatic
PDC activation on obstacle detection, refer to
page 237, for instance in automatic vehicle
washes.
Malfunction
Park assistance button
A Check Control message is displayed.
White symbol is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Control
Display.
Camera
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐
ice center or repair shop.
Without Surround View:
rearview camera
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
trunk lid.
Concept
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens.
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐
play.
Switching on/off
Safety information
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically if selec‐
tor lever position R is engaged when the engine
is running.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
241
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
displayed, refer to page 242.
Depending on the vehicle
equipment: switching on/off
manually
▷
"Obstacle mark.".
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance
Control are displayed, refer to page 243,
by markings.
Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Parking aid lines
The parking assistance functions are shown on
the Control Display.
Pathway lines
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the controller to the side.
2.
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
Functional requirements
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a trailer
power socket can restrict the visibility range
of the camera.
Turning radius lines
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
The assistance functions can be manually acti‐
vated.
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
3.
▷
"Parking aid lines".
242
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
System limits
Deactivated camera
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
If the camera is deactivated, for instance if the
trunk lid is open, the camera image is displayed
hatched in gray.
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐
sistance functions also consider data from the
PDC Park Distance Control.
Obstacle marking
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐
trol chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Surround View with
Parking Assistant Plus
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles
behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park
Distance Control sensors.
Concept
The system provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
General information
Several cameras capture the area from different
selectable perspectives. In addition, assistance
functions, for instance guidelines, can be faded
into the display.
Setting brightness and contrast
via iDrive
With the rearview camera switched on:
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
2.
3.
"Camera image"
"Brightness"
"Contrast"
▷ Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 245: the system shows the camera
perspective suitable for the respective driving
situation.
▷
▷
4. Set the desired value.
▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 245: for rep‐
resenting the areas behind the vehicle.
243
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view, refer to
page 247: for representing the areas on the
sides of the vehicle.
Cameras
▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive. avail‐
able camera, refer to page 245.
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 248: to
present cross traffic, for instance at junctions
and driveways, depending on the currently
engaged gear.
Depending on the view, the environment around
the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Front camera
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.
Rearview camera
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐
terior mirror housing.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on the
camera lenses. If required, clean the camera
lenses.
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Switching on/off
Switching on automatically
The system is switched on automatically, refer to
page 237, if selector lever position R is engaged
when the engine is running.
244
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐
tive driving situation is displayed.
Side view
The side view can be selected for the right or left
vehicle side.
Switching on/off manually
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by
displaying the side surroundings.
Press the park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The side view looks from rear to front and in case
of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐
stacles.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic camera perspective
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐
ing direction.
Automatic deactivation during
forward travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
This perspective adapts to the respective driving
situation.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Camera perspective
Overview
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary,
changes to a side view.
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic
camera perspective is closed and the system
uses a fixed perspective of the rearview camera.
If necessary, manually select the automatic cam‐
era perspective when reverse gear is engaged.
The automatic camera perspective will be re‐
tained for the current parking maneuver.
Movable unobstructed camera
perspective
With selection of the movable camera perspec‐
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Function bar, left
Camera image
Side view
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected.
Automatic camera perspective
Movable unobstructed camera perspective
Function bar, right
The current perspective is marked with a camera
symbol.
Rearview camera
With BMW Gesture Control: the movable camera
perspective can be moved around the circle us‐
ing BMW Gesture Control, refer to page 57.
Selection window
Selection window
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
lected in the selection window via iDrive.
To leave the function, move the Controller side‐
ways and select another camera function.
245
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The following assistance functions are automati‐
cally displayed:
Rearview camera
This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐
era.
▷ Side protection, refer to page 247.
▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 247.
Function bars
Parking aid lines
Function bar on the right
Pathway lines
Assistance functions, refer to page 246, can be
activated via the right function bar and settings
can be entered. Move the Controller to the right,
if needed.
▷
▷
▷
"Autom. Parking", refer to page 250.
"Back-up Assistant", refer to page 255.
"Camera image"
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Brightness", refer to page 249.
"Contrast", refer to page 249.
"Parking aid lines", refer to page 246.
"Obstacle mark.", refer to page 247.
"Settings": apply settings, for instance to
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space re‐
quired when parking and maneuvering on level
roads.
▷
Pathway lines depend on the steering angle and
are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel
movements.
use the activation points for Panorama View.
Function bar on the left
The left function bar can be used for the direct
selection of various views. Move the Controller to
the left, if needed.
Turning radius lines
▷
▷
▷
"Car wash", refer to page 247.
"Parking": around the vehicle.
"3D view": available camera, refer to
page 245.
Assistance functions
General information
More than one assistance function can be active
at the same time.
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
The following assistance functions can be man‐
ually activated:
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level road.
▷
▷
▷
"Parking aid lines".
"Obstacle mark.".
"Car wash".
Only one turning radius line is displayed after the
steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.
246
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Parking using pathway and turning radius
lines
Side protection
Concept
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning ra‐
dius line leads to within the limits of the park‐
ing space.
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
the vehicle.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.
Display
Obstacle marking
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐
cle.
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the
PDC Park Distance Control sensors.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐
stacles.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera
image.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings
match the markings of the PDC Park Distance
Control.
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
Vehicle wash view
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the
markings are not shown anymore in the display
after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle
must be newly captured.
Door opening angle
Concept
If obstacle marking is activated, the system indi‐
cates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening
angles of the doors.
The vehicle wash view assists when entering a
vehicle wash by displaying the floor and the vehi‐
cle's own track.
The system does not provide a warning of ap‐
proaching traffic.
247
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in
the front and rear capture the sideways traffic
area to improve the view.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front
and rear end of the vehicle.
The camera image shows different levels of dis‐
tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for
distance estimations.
The maximum opening angle of the doors is dis‐
played in selector lever position P.
Display on the Control Display
Press the button when the engine is run‐
ning.
As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the open‐
ing angles are replaced by parking aid lines.
Depending on the driving direction, the image of
the respective camera is displayed:
Limits of the display
▷ "front": front camera image.
▷ "rear": rear camera image.
The vehicle surroundings are displayed with dis‐
torted image for technical reasons.
Even if the symbols for the door opening angles
do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐
play, the following needs to be noted when park‐
ing next to other objects:
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐
fic warning, refer to page 261, can additionally
warn against oncoming vehicles using radar sen‐
sors.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
Control Display.
With navigation system: activation
points
Concept
Panorama View
Concept
Positions where Panorama View should switch
on automatically can be stored as activation
points provided that a GPS signal is received.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points
1. Drive to the position at which the system is to
be switched on, and stop.
The system provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections.
2.
Press the button.
3. Move the Controller to the right.
4. "Add activation point"
General information
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐
248
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The current position is displayed.
5. "Activation point"
Via iDrive:
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
Activation points are, if possible, stored with
town/city and street address, or else with the
GPS coordinates.
2.
3.
"Camera image"
"Brightness"
"Contrast"
▷
▷
Using activation points
4. Set the desired value.
The use of activation points can be switched on
and off.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited extent
in the following situations:
1.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Settings"
Press the button.
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door open.
4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"
▷ With the trunk lid open.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically
when set activation points are reached."
Gray hatched areas with symbol, for instance
open door, in the camera image mark areas that
are currently not displayed.
Displaying activation points
1.
Press the button.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
System limits
3.
"Manage points"
Non-visible areas
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Renaming or deleting activation points
1.
Press the button.
Detection of objects
2. Move the Controller to the right.
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
3.
"Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Some assistance functions also consider data
from the PDC Park Distance Control.
4. Select an activation point as needed.
5.
▷ "Rename"
Follow, refer to page 236, the notes in the PDC
Park Distance Control chapter.
▷ "Delete activation point"
▷ "Delete all activation points"
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate
the distance from the objects on the display.
Setting brightness and contrast
Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control
Display.
249
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
A yellow symbol is displayed and the re‐
cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐
era is displayed in black on the Control
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ When other camera functions are being per‐
formed in the vehicle.
Display.
▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
Remote 3D View
Concept
With the proper equipment, the BMW Con‐
nected App and the camera images from Sur‐
round View can be used to display the vehicle
surroundings on a mobile device such as a
smartphone.
▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
every country.
▷ For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two
hours.
Parking Assistant
The function displays a momentary view of the
situation.
Concept
Functional requirements
▷ Data transmission must be activated, refer to
page 69.
▷ BMW Connected App must be installed on
the mobile device.
Switching the function on/off
Via iDrive:
The system supports the driver in the following
situations:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
parking.
3. "General settings"
4. "Data privacy"
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
reverse parking diagonally to the road, diago‐
nal parking. The system orients itself with the
middle of the parking space during diagonal
parking.
5. "Configure services"
6. "BMW ConnectedDrive"
7. "Remote 3D View"
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
driving out of parallel parking spaces, refer to
page 254.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional or may
not be available in the following situations:
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
exiting tight parking or street situations in re‐
verse, see Back-up assistant, refer to
page 255.
▷ In poor light.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
▷ With a door or the trunk lid open. Dark fields
in the display indicate areas that are not re‐
corded by the system.
250
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
fic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐
ate.
General information
The functions for parking diagonally to the road,
driving out of parallel parking spaces, and driving
out in reverse may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Handling
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
The safety information of the PDC Park Distance
Control, refer to page 236, applies in addition.
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Overview
System status and instructions on required ac‐
tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Button in the vehicle
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
Steptronic transmission
The parking assistant calculates the best possi‐
ble parking line and takes control of the following
functions during the parking procedure:
▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Parking is automatic.
Park assistance button
Ultrasound sensors
Remote Control Parking
The vehicle can be remotely parked and driven
out, refer to page 257, in reverse if suitable for‐
ward-parking spaces are available.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing the
traffic conditions. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all traf‐
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors in the bumpers, the
251
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
parking spaces are measured and the distances
to obstacles determined.
Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button
Functional requirements
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
Ultrasound sensors
The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
Ensure full functionality:
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Switching on with reverse gear
Shift into reverse.
For measuring parking spaces
The current status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx.
22 mph/35 km/h.
To activate:
"Autom. Parking"
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles:
5 ft/1.5 m.
Switching on via iDrive
Suitable parking space
General information:
Display of the rearview camera or PDC view
must be active.
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
1. Move the Controller to the right.
2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Display:
"Autom. Parking"
Display on the Control Display
System activated/deactivated
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your
vehicle's length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Sym‐
bol
Meaning
Depending on the equipment version: diagonal
parking:
Gray: the system is not available.
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
White: the system is available but not
activated.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The system is activated.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐
mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces.
Parking space search is active.
The parking procedure is active.
Steering control has been taken over
by system.
For parking
▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed.
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened.
252
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Parking assistant is activated.
Parking space search and system
status
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed of
up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a dis‐
tance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on the
Control Display, refer to page 253.
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the
parking process: select the parking space on
the Control Display.
The system takes over the steering.
▷
Parking assistant is activated and parking
space search is active.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐
hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active,
suitable parking spaces are highlighted and
an acoustic signal sounds. Switch signal tone
on/off, refer to page 254.
At the end of the parking procedure, the P
selector lever position is set.
The end of the parking procedure is indicated
on the Control Display.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly
detected, the system automatically adjusts
the suitable parking method. In the case of
parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐
nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In
this case, the desired parking method must
be selected manually.
Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
▷
Press the park assistance button.
▷
The parking procedure is active. Steering
control has been taken over by system.
▷
"Autom. Parking" Select the symbol on
the Control Display.
▷ Parking space search is always active when‐
ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and
straight, even if the system is deactivated.
When the system is deactivated, the displays
on the Control Display are shown in gray.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
Parking using the parking
assistant
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome, such as curbs.
Parking
1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐
tant.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐
pear.
Engage the reverse gear and activate the
system or press the parking assistance but‐
ton, refer to page 252, on the Control Display.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
clearances that are too small.
253
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or
the time taken for parking is exceeded.
Depending on the equipment
version: driving out of a parking
space using the parking
assistant
▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
▷ If the trunk lid is open.
▷ If doors are open.
Concept
▷ When setting the parking brake.
▷ During acceleration.
The system makes driving out of parallel parking
spaces easier.
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an
extended period while the vehicle is station‐
ary.
General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Resuming
Steptronic transmission
An interrupted parking procedure can be contin‐
ued, if needed.
The parking assistant calculates an optimal line
for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐
trol of the following functions during the maneu‐
ver:
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 252, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
▷ Steering.
Switching off
The system can be switched off manually:
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing the gears.
Press the park assistance button.
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can
drive out of the parking space without further
steering movements.
Switching signal tone for
suitable parking spaces on/off
Via iDrive:
Functional requirement
▷ The vehicle has been parked using the park‐
ing assistant.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷ An obstacle has been detected in front of the
vehicle.
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Automatic Parking"
6. "Alert if parking space detected"
▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐
ger than your vehicle.
Driving out of parking spaces
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
2. Steptronic transmission:
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
254
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Press the park assistance button or shift into
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to
switch on the parking assistant.
Functional requirement
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the
route.
3. Move the Controller to the right.
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored.
4. Activate the parking assistant on the Control
▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving
speed of 22 mph/36 km/h.
Display:
"Autom. Parking"
5. On the Control Display, confirm the required
direction for driving out of the parking space if
necessary.
▷ The return route must be at least
12 in./30 cm wider than your vehicle.
6. Steptronic transmission:
Driving back with automated
steering
1. Press the park assistance button or shift into
reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary
and the drive-ready state is switched on.
The system takes control of the maneuver. A
message will be displayed at the end of the
maneuver.
7. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of the parking space and drive off
as usual.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Back-up Assistant"
The parking assistant is switched off auto‐
matically.
The system takes over the steering.
The possible route is shown on the Control
Display.
Depending on the equipment
version: back-up assistant
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal
and the brake.
Concept
When driving in reverse, pay attention to the
vehicle's surroundings, and if you suddenly
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Pay attention
to the information from the PDC.
The system supports the driver when driving in
reverse, for instance when driving out of tight
parking or street situations.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of the
last route before the vehicle is switched off. This
stored route can be driven back with automated
steering.
5. Follow the instructions on the Control Display
where required.
6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is
reached and take control of the vehicle, such
as by shifting to a forward gear.
General information
This function may not be available. Contact your
authorized dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center as to whether this addi‐
tional function is currently in your vehicle or when
it can be installed in your vehicle in the future.
At the end of the stored route, a signal will
sound and a request will be displayed, also
with the instruction to take control of the ve‐
hicle.
The system takes control of the steering when
driving in reverse along the stored route.
Terminating the system
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐
erator pedal and brake.
255
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
takes over steering.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
▷ When engaging a forward gear.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐
versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐
ing angle.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
Limits of the back-up assistant
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you
suddenly encounter an obstacle, stop imme‐
diately and take over control of the vehicle.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is
limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning
is issued and the function may be canceled.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
System limits
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
Safety information
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
No parking assistance
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
256
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
▷ BMW display key, refer to page 83.
the lane.
▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to
page 236.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
Button on the BMW display key: the button on
the side of the BMW display key must be
▷ With plants and bushes.
pressed and held for the duration of the parking
procedure so that the vehicle can move. Release
the button for obstacles to manually stop the ve‐
hicle. The vehicle stops with emergency braking.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
If the ultrasound sensors detect obstacles in the
parking space or the end of the parking space,
the system automatically stops the vehicle as
needed.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
tected at all.
The headlight is switched on for the duration of
the procedure.
Safety information
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Warning
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing traffic
and parking situation. Based on the limits of the
system, it cannot independently react to all sit‐
uations. There is a risk of accident. Watch traf‐
fic and parking situation closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
Remote Control Parking
Concept
The vehicle can be remotely parked and driven
out in reverse in the case of suitable forward-
parking spaces, for instance a garage. The driver
is not in the vehicle, but controls the parking pro‐
cedure responsibly from the outside using the
BMW display key, refer to page 83.
Warning
Unauthorized persons, for instance children,
can move the vehicle using the BMW display
key without anybody in the vehicle. There is a
risk of accident. Protect the BMW display key
against unauthorized use.
Stop the vehicles manually in the case of obsta‐
cles.
Using the BMW display key, the vehicle can be
moved by approx. 2 times the vehicle length.
The speed is approx. 1.1 mph/1.8 km/h.
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle over
or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to
property. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
tervene where appropriate.
General information
The following systems are included in the sys‐
tem:
▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 250.
257
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Overview
Ultrasound sensors
One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐
terior mirror housing.
Functional requirements
General information
There are no occupants in the vehicle during the
parking procedure.
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
and the ultrasound sensors in the bumpers, the
parking spaces are measured and the distances
to obstacles determined.
Driver interventions in the vehicle's interior,
such as steering, will cancel the function.
Cameras
In addition to the ultrasonic sensors, the parking
situation during Remote Control Parking is de‐
tected using four cameras.
Cameras and ultrasound sensors
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐
ers.
▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed. Clean
them as needed.
▷ Keep camera lenses clean and unobstructed.
Clean them as needed.
Suitable parking space
Front camera.
▷ It is possible to forward-park into the parking
space in a straight, centered line.
Rearview camera.
258
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ Width of the parking space: vehicle's own
width without exterior mirrors, plus approx.
1.3 ft/0.4 m on each side, arrow 1.
8. To start the parking procedure: touch the ar‐
row symbol for "drive forward" on the display.
Press and hold the button: the vehicle
moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐
lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐
ing range to stop the vehicle.
▷ Distance to parking space, max. 6.5 ft/2 m, ar‐
row 2.
▷ To move the vehicle with remote control, the
driver must hold the BMW display key within
the wireless range, arrow 3, outside the vehi‐
cle.
For approach movements: touch the arrow
symbol for "drive backward".
9. At the end of the parking procedure, release
the button on the side of the BMW display
key. The vehicle stops.
Maximum distance from vehicle approx.
5 ft/1.5 m to approx. 13 ft/4 m.
▷ Uphill or downhill grades max. 5 %.
▷ No duplex garages.
"ENGINE STOP": tap the button.
▷ The parking brake is set.
▷ The engine is switched off.
Lock the vehicle.
Forward parking
Parking
While driving forward, the system applies minor
steering corrections as needed.
Cancel, pause, continue the parking
procedure
To cancel or pause the parking procedure:
Release the button. The vehicle stops with
emergency braking.
1. Approach the parking space driving forward,
centered and in a straight line. Stop at a dis‐
tance of maximum 6.5 ft/2 m.
To continue the parking procedure:
2. Engage selector lever position P and set the
parking brake. Switch off the drive-ready
state and engine using the Start/Stop button.
Alternatively, the engine can continue to run.
Press the button again within 30 seconds.
Driving out in reverse
3. All the occupants leave the vehicle. Closing
the doors.
Driving out of parking spaces
When driving in reverse, the vehicle drives back‐
ward in a straight line without steering.
4. If necessary, switch on the display on the
BMW display key, refer to page 83, and can‐
cel the display block.
1. If necessary, switch on the display on the
BMW display key, refer to page 83, and can‐
cel the display block.
On the BMW display key, change to the
menu: "R/C parking"
2. Unlock the vehicle.
5.
Press and hold the button on the side of
the BMW display key for the duration of the
parking procedure.
3. On the BMW display key, change to the
menu: "R/C parking"
4.
Press and hold the button on the side of
the BMW display key for the duration of the
parking procedure.
6. Wait, until function readiness is indicated on
the display. Observe possible SMS text mes‐
sages.
5. Wait, until function readiness is indicated on
the display. Observe possible SMS text mes‐
sages.
7. "ENGINE START": tap the button to start the
engine if necessary.
259
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
6. "ENGINE START": tap the button. The en‐
gine starts.
System limits
7. To start the reversing out procedure: touch
the arrow symbol for "drive backward" on the
display.
Safety information
Warning
Press and hold the button: the vehicle
moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐
lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐
ing range to stop the vehicle.
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐
tions or other factors, the system may not re‐
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as
warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐
er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐
tem’s operation and limitations.
8. At the end of the reversing out procedure, re‐
lease the button on the side of the BMW dis‐
play key. The vehicle stops.
9. Enter using the BMW display key and drive
off as normal.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be switched off
using the BMW display key:
No parking assistance
The parking assistant does not offer assistance
in the following situations:
"ENGINE STOP": tap the button.
▷ The parking brake is set.
▷ The engine is switched off.
Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
▷ At very high or very low external tempera‐
tures.
Cancel, pause, continue the parking
procedure
To cancel or pause the parking procedure:
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
Release the button. The vehicle stops with
emergency braking.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
To continue the parking procedure:
Press the button again within 30 seconds.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
Messages on the BMW display
key
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
The symbol identifies system messages.
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
260
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
Functional limitations due to radio
interference
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system.
In the case of radio interference, functional limita‐
tions may occur, refer to page 86, during Remote
Control Parking with the BMW display key.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be de‐
tected or suitable parking spaces may not be de‐
tected at all.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
the following situations:
▷ For small children and animals.
Cross traffic warning
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance
coats.
Concept
▷ With external interference of the ultrasound,
for instance from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
At blind driveways or when driving out of diago‐
nal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic is
detected sooner by the system than is possible
from the driver's seat.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged
or out of position.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
relative humidity, wet conditions, snowfall,
cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.
General information
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
The system indicates approaching traffic.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic
area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well.
Two additional radar sensors are located in the
front bumpers.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
261
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for the
driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility
and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, two addi‐
tional radar sensors are located in the front
bumpers.
Overview
Always keep the bumper in the area of the radar
sensors clean and unobstructed.
Button in the vehicle
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating the system
1.
2. Move the Controller to the right.
3. "Settings"
Press the park assistance button.
4. "Cross traffic warning"
5. "Cross traffic warning"
Or via iDrive:
Park assistance button
Radar sensors
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver Assistance"
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
5. "Cross traffic warning"
6. "Cross traffic warning"
Switching on automatically
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is
active and a gear is engaged.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
262
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
engaged.
Display in the PDC Park Distance
Control view
Switching off automatically
The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded.
▷ With an active parking operation of the park‐
ing assistant.
In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐
spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles
are detected by the sensors.
Warning
General information
Display in the camera view
The respective display is called up on the Con‐
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
light in the exterior mirror may flash.
Light in the exterior mirror
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected
by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles
are detected by the rear sensors and your own
vehicle is moving backwards.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐
nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐
spective direction.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is very
high.
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
263
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered,
for instance by stickers.
▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the
sensors, that hide cross traffic.
264
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
make sure that the areas of movement around
the vehicle and at the wheel housing are free.
Vehicle features and
options
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Air suspension
Level adjustment
Concept
Air suspension ensures best possible driving
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a varia‐
ble adjustment of the front and rear axles, the
damping is adjusted to the vehicle state.
Adjusting the level manually
Press the button.
General information
In the case of an uneven road surface, the vehi‐
cle level can be elevated to increase ground
clearance.
In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to
the raised level with a press of the button.
Starting at a speed of approx. 20 mph/35 km/h
the vehicle lowers itself automatically to the nor‐
mal level.
▷ Normal level, for normal road surface.
▷ Raised level, when the road surface is poor.
Display
In the SPORT driving mode, refer to page 135,
or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers itself.
▷ LED off: normal level.
▷ LED flashes: level is being adjusted.
▷ LED lit: raised level.
Safety information
▷ LED flashes rapidly: level adjustment not pos‐
sible.
Warning
Adjusting the vehicle height may result in trap‐
ped body parts or damaged vehicle parts.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. When adjusting the vehicle height,
System limits
▷ It may not be possible to change the level
during dynamic driving.
265
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
▷ It may only be possible to lift the vehicle level
while the engine is running.
Adaptive chassis
▷ If the state of charge of the vehicle battery is
too low, a level change may not be possible.
Concept
This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion
when using a dynamic driving style or traveling
on uneven road surfaces.
▷ If level adjustment is activated frequently in
quick succession, the system switches off to
prevent overheating and is temporarily un‐
available or operates with a delay. Let the
system cool, if needed.
General information
This enhances the driving dynamics and driving
comfort depending on the road surface condition
and driving style.
The rapidly flashing LED on the button indi‐
cates that the system is unavailable.
▷ If the load is increased, the highest driving
level may be locked or automatically exited in
order to protect the system
Tuning
The system offers several different damping set‐
tings.
Wheel change
The damping settings are assigned to the differ‐
ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐
trol, refer to page 135.
Before a wheel change, deactivate the system:
Press the button and hold for approx.
7 seconds, until the LED flashes rapidly.
Driving mode
Damper tuning
To activate system:
COMFORT
ECO PRO
Balanced out
The system is activated again automatically
when you drive away.
COMFORT PLUS
Comfortable
Firm
Malfunction
SPORT
A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐
tem is impaired. Vehicle handling may be altered
and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced.
Visit the nearest dealer's service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
SPORT PLUS
Executive Drive Pro
Long periods when vehicle is
parked
During long periods when the vehicle is parked, it
can lower itself. This is not a malfunction.
Concept
Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled
chassis. The system increases driving comfort
and minimizes the lateral tilt when driving around
curves.
If drive-ready state is switched on with the doors
closed, the vehicle is raised to the normal level
automatically.
General information
For active control, this system uses the available
information, for instance from the navigation sys‐
tem, the Driving style analysis and the camera-
based look-ahead data.
266
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
This information influences the control of the fol‐
lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving
mode, refer to page 137:
▷ Adaptive chassis, refer to page 266.
▷ Active roll stabilization, refer to page 267.
This further increases the agility and comfort of
the vehicle.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐
ample.
Active roll stabilization
Concept
The system reduces the lateral tilt of the vehicle
that occurs during rapid driving in curves or dur‐
ing quick evasive maneuvers.
General information
The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by
permanent adjustment on the front and rear
axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.
Agility and driving comfort are increased under all
driving conditions.
Tuning
The system offers several different tunings.
The tunings are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to
page 135.
Driving mode
Tuning
COMFORT
Comfortable
COMFORT PLUS
ECO PRO
SPORT
Firm
SPORT PLUS
267
Climate control
CONTROLS
Climate control
Vehicle features and
options
Automatic climate control
Overview
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Buttons in the vehicle
Interior air quality
Climate control functions
The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the
following components:
Button
Function
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Microfilter.
Temperature, refer to page 269.
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode.
Depending on the equipment specification:
▷ Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
▷ Ionization.
Climate control operation, refer
to page 270.
▷ Fragrancing.
Maximum cooling, refer to
page 270.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control AUC.
▷ Parked-car ventilation.
AUTO program, refer to
page 270.
Recirculated-air mode, refer to
page 271.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 272.
Air distribution, manual, refer to
page 272.
SYNC program, refer to
page 272.
268
Climate control
CONTROLS
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Button
Function
Defrost and defog window, refer
to page 273.
Adjusting
Rear window defroster, refer to
page 273.
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 126.
Seat heating, refer to page 125.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
Seat and armrest heating, refer
to page 125.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Temperature:"
7. Set the desired temperature.
8. "OK"
Ambient air package, refer to
page 281.
Switching on/off
Switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ SYNC program.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
▷ Seat heating.
Temperature of the ventilation
General information
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
body region can be adjusted.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Switching off
▷ Complete system:
Press and hold the left button on the
driver's side until the control panel
switches off.
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g.
colder toward blue, warmer toward red.
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body
region heats or cools noticeably, depending on
the adjusted temperature.
▷ On the front passenger side:
Press and hold the left button on the
front passenger side.
This does not change the set interior tempera‐
ture for the driver and front passenger.
Temperature
Concept
Adjusting
Via iDrive:
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
269
Climate control
CONTROLS
3. "Climate control"
Maximum cooling
Concept
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
6. "Temp. adjustment upper body"
7. Set the desired temperature:
▷ Toward blue: colder.
▷ Toward red: warmer.
General information
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Air conditioning
Concept
Switching on/off
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐
humidified and, depending on the temperature
setting, warmed again.
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Switching on/off
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐
gram active.
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
tioning switched on.
AUTO program
Concept
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
the car's interior automatically.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "A/C"
The air distribution and temperature are control‐
led automatically depending on the temperature
in the car's interior and the desired temperature
setting including the selected intensity of the air
flow.
Air conditioning is switched on with the engine
running.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
ready state is switched on.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, con‐
densation water develops and collects under‐
neath the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
270
Climate control
CONTROLS
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Automatic"
The outside air supply is shut off and the interior
air is recirculated.
General information
Depending on the selected temperature, the in‐
tensity of the AUTO program, and outside influ‐
ences, the air is directed to the windshield, side
windows, upper body, and into the floor area.
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐
tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off
automatically.
If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐
ously flows into the car's interior.
The air conditioning, refer to page 270, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
Point the side vents toward the side windows.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window con‐
densation as much as possible.
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
The AUTO program is switched off automati‐
cally, when manual air distribution is set.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Intensity
3. "Climate control"
4. If necessary, "Air quality"
5. "Auto-recirculate"
With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐
sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic
control for the air flow and air distribution.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
page 273.
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase intensity.
Via iDrive:
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Level"
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants
in the immediate environment by temporarily
suspending the supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air flow within the vehicle.
7. Set the desired intensity.
Operation
The selected intensity is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Press the button:
The LED is illuminated when recircu‐
lated-air mode is switched on. The supply of out‐
side air is shut off.
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC rec‐
ognizes odors or pollutants in the outside air.
271
Climate control
CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
Adjusting the air distribution
manually
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Concept
3. "Climate control"
4. "Air quality"
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Fresh air"
Operation
▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ "Auto-recirculate"
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environmental
conditions.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
▷ Windows and floor area.
▷ Windows: driver's side only.
▷ Windows and upper body.
▷ Upper body region.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air qual‐
ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window
fogging increases.
If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐
culated-air mode or defog the windows, refer to
page 273.
The selected air distribution is shown on the dis‐
play of the automatic climate control.
If there is window condensation, defog the win‐
dows, refer to page 273.
Adjusting the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
SYNC program
Concept
Depending on the equipment, the following set‐
tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the
front-passenger side and the rear:
General information
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
program first.
▷ Temperature.
▷ Air flow.
Operation
▷ Air distribution.
▷ AUTO program.
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase air flow.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The air flow of the automatic climate control may
be reduced automatically to save battery power.
The LED is illuminated with the SYNC
program switched on.
272
Climate control
CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐
eous pollutants from the outside air that enters
the vehicle.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Have this combined filter changed during vehicle
maintenance, refer to page 368.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Synchronize"
The program is switched off automatically if the
settings on the front passenger side or in the
rear are changed.
Ventilation
Concept
The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
justed.
To defrost windows and remove
condensation
Concept
Adjusting the ventilation
General information
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windshield and the front side windows.
The air flow directions can be adjusted for direct
or indirect ventilation.
Switching on/off
Open the vents and position them in a way that
ensures effective climate control.
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Direct ventilation
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
system switched on.
The air flow is directed towards the passengers.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending
on the adjusted temperature.
If there is window condensation, press
the button on the driver's side or switch
on air conditioning to utilize the condensation
sensor. Make sure that air can flow to the wind‐
shield.
Indirect ventilation
The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐
gers. The car's interior is warmed or cooled indi‐
rectly, depending on the set temperature.
Rear window defroster
Front ventilation
Press the button. The LED lights up.
The function is available with the engine running.
The rear window defroster switches off automat‐
ically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the
incoming air.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
273
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
Rear automatic climate
control
▷ Touch sensor or thumbwheel to vary the ven‐
tilation temperature, arrow 3.
Overview
With touch sensor, push the marking in the
desired direction:
Buttons in the vehicle
Ventilation in rear, center
Climate control functions
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
Button
Function
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
Temperature, refer to page 275
Ventilation in the rear, on the
side
Maximum cooling, refer to
page 275.
AUTO program, refer to
page 275.
Air flow, manual, refer to
page 276.
Air distribution, manual, refer to
page 276.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐
row 1.
Active seat ventilation, refer to
page 126.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing
of the vents, arrow 2.
Seat heating, refer to page 125.
Seat and armrest heating, refer
to page 125.
274
Climate control
CONTROLS
Via iDrive:
Switching on/off
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Activate heating/cooling"
6. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
7. "Temperature"
8. Set the desired temperature.
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting the
windows and removing condensation is active.
Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐
ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate
control will not have sufficient time to adjust the
set temperature.
Using the button: switching on
Press any button except for the following:
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
Maximum cooling
Concept
The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐
timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the
drive-ready state switched on.
▷ Seat ventilation.
Using the button: switching off
General information
Press and hold the left side of the but‐
ton.
The function is available with external tempera‐
tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, by
using the maximum cooling or heating capacity,
and then keeps it constant.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the system
switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Adjusting
AUTO program
Concept
Turn the wheel to set the desired
temperature.
Air flow, air distribution and temperature are con‐
trolled automatically.
275
Climate control
CONTROLS
Switching on/off
Controlling the air flow manually
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
program switched on.
Via iDrive:
General information
1. "CAR"
To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO
program first.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Automatic"
Operation
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase air flow.
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is
directed to the upper body and into the floor
area.
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Controlling the air distribution
manually
Intensity
With the AUTO program activated, the automatic
intensity control can be changed:
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐
justed manually.
Press the left or right side of the button:
to decrease or increase intensity.
Operation
Via iDrive:
Press the button repeatedly to select a
program:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
▷ Upper body region.
▷ Upper body region and floor area.
▷ Floor area.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Second row of seats"
6. "Level"
BMW Touch Command
Operation of the rear automatic climate control is
also possible via BMW Touch Command.
7. Set the desired intensity.
The air flow and air distribution are controlled au‐
tomatically depending on the selected intensity.
The selected intensity is shown on the display of
the automatic climate control.
Parked-car ventilation
Concept
The car's interior can be cooled or heated before
driving off with the parked-car ventilation. De‐
pending on set temperature and ambient tem‐
276
Climate control
CONTROLS
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or possi‐
bly heated using the residual engine heat.
▷ Seat ventilation.
▷ SYNC program.
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐
ing the vehicle.
General information
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
Via iDrive
The activation time is determined based on the
external temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure time.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"
5. "Start now"
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
Via BMW display key
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the
vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit
the maximum activation time to save the ve‐
hicle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
Switching on
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3. Tap the
symbol or the
symbol.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
General information
Switching off
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
2. "Precondit. setting"
There are different ways to switch the system on
or off.
3. Tap the
4. "Stop"
symbol or the
symbol.
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
Display
symbol on the automatic climate control indi‐
cates the system is switched on.
Using the button
REST is displayed on the automatic climate con‐
trol. The residual engine heat is used.
When the vehicle is in standby state, the parked-
car ventilation can be switched on or off via the
automatic climate control buttons.
Departure time
Concept
Different departure times can be set to ensure a
comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at
the time of departure.
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating.
277
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷ One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
The system is switched on once.
2. "Settings"
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"
5. "Preconditioning for departure"
6. "Departure schedule"
7. Activate the desired departure time.
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
switched on promptly before the set depar‐
ture time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
Via BMW display key
▷ Activate departure times.
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Setting the departure time
2. "Precondit. setting"
Via iDrive
3. Tap the
symbol or the
symbol.
1. "CAR"
4. Tap on the symbol.
2. "Settings"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
3. "Climate control"
Display
4. "Pre-ventilation" or "Pre-heating/ventilation"
5. "Departure schedule"
6. Select the desired departure time.
7. Set the departure time.
8. Select day of the week, if needed.
,
Symbol on the climate control display
signals an activated departure time.
Stationary climate control
through Remote Engine
Start
Via BMW display key
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Concept
2. "Precondit. setting"
Stationary climate control cools or heats the car's
interior prior to departure to a comfortable tem‐
perature. The system automatically cools, vents,
and heats depending on the interior, external,
and set temperature. Snow and ice may be re‐
moved more easily.
3. Tap the
symbol or the
symbol.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
The system starts the engine automatically and
allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Activating the departure time
Functional requirement
If a departure time is to influence the switching
on of parked-car ventilation, the respective de‐
parture time must be activated first.
278
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
Safety information
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐
sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute
the area in and around the vehicle or enter into
the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐
tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐
closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐
tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate
Enabling the automatic engine
start function
The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐
fore using the system.
Otherwise, the engine cannot switch on auto‐
matically to climatize the car's interior.
outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life.
Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐
cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐
mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐
sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. If necessary, "Remote Engine Start"
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"
7. Confirm the disclaimer.
Warning
When stationary climate control is in operation,
high temperatures can occur underneath the
body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas
system. If combustible materials, such as
leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts
of the exhaust gas system, these materials can
ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no
combustible materials can come in contact with
hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐
trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline,
oil or other combustible objects.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
The parking lights are switched on as long as the
system is switched on.
Switching on/off directly
General information
There are different ways to switch the system on
or off:
Functional requirements
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
▷ Via iDrive.
▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system
will be available again as soon as the drive-
ready state is activated and deactivated
again.
▷ Via remote control.
▷ Via BMW display key.
The system switches off automatically after ap‐
prox. 15 minutes.
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system will
be available again as soon as the drive-ready
state is activated and deactivated again.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
▷ Hood is closed.
279
Climate control
CONTROLS
Via iDrive
Display
1. "CAR"
Symbol
Description
2. "Settings"
Symbol on the BMW display
key for automatic climate
control.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. "Start now"
The symbol flashes while
Remote Engine Start is run‐
ning.
Via remote control
The system can be switched on and off using
the remote control.
Climatization for the requested
departure time
Press the button on the remote control
three times within 1 second.
After operating the remote control, it will take ap‐
proximately 3 seconds until the engine is
switched on.
General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in the
system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐
ture in the vehicle at the time of departure.
To switch off the system, press the button again
three times.
▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
Via BMW display key
The system is switched on once.
Switching on:
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set.
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
On the desired weekdays, the system will be
switched on 10 minutes before the set de‐
parture time.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3.
Tap on the symbol.
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start"
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times.
Switching off:
▷ Activate departure times.
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
The climate control function will start approxi‐
mately 10 minutes before the set departure time
and continue for 5 more minutes after the depar‐
ture time.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3.
Tap on the symbol.
For reasons of safety, the system can only be
switched on twice consecutively. The system will
be available again as soon as the drive-ready
state is activated and deactivated again.
4. "Stop"
Observe the information about the intended use
of the vehicle, refer to page 10.
280
Climate control
CONTROLS
Via BMW display key
Setting the departure time
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Precondit. setting"
2. "Settings"
3.
Tap on the symbol.
3. "Climate control"
4. Activating the desired departure time:
Tap on the symbol.
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
The symbol on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time.
Display in the instrument cluster
Via BMW display key
Symbol
Description
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the stationary cli‐
mate control. The vehicle is not
ready to drive.
2. "Precondit. setting"
3.
Tap on the symbol.
4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
7. "OK"
Ambient air package
Concept
Activating the departure time
The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
grances.
Functional requirement
If a requested departure time is to influence the
switching on of the system, the respective de‐
parture time must be activated first.
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
pended particles. Together with the selected fra‐
grance, ionization contributes to well-being and
relaxation while driving.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
General information
2. "Settings"
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible
by replacing the fragrance cartridges.
3. "Climate control"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
The following criteria can influence the percep‐
tion of scents in the car's interior:
,
The symbol on the automatic climate
control signals an activated departure time
▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ Temperature and air humidity.
▷ Time of day and season.
281
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants,
for instance fatigue.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW
fragrance cartridges.
To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐
hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur
prior to the trip. The system is automatically
switched on with the parked-car ventilation if fra‐
grancing was switched on at the end of the last
trip.
The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not
suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty,
replace it with a new fragrance cartridge.
Safety information
Overview
Warning
Button in the center console
Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can
cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐
functions, and damage to the system. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a
cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐
grance cartridge.
Ionization
Concept
Fragrancing
Ionization cleans the car's interior air of sus‐
pended particles.
Functional requirements
▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.
▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃
and 104 ℉/+40 ℃.
Switching on/off
Via iDrive:
▷ Open the vents to allow the fragrance to flow
out.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Ionization"
Selecting the fragrance
The car's interior is fragranced depending on the
selected fragrance.
Two different fragrances can be selected in the
vehicle.
Fragrancing
Via iDrive:
General information
Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid
a habituation effect.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
switching between the fragrances.
282
Climate control
CONTROLS
5. "Fragrance"
4. "Fragrance"
6. Select the desired fragrance.
5. "Show fragrance setting"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
The menu is shown on the Control Display.
Fragrance cartridge filling level
Switching fragrancing on/off,
adjusting intensity
The illustrations on the Control Display show the
actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges.
Via iDrive:
Using the button
1. "CAR"
Press the button once for each intensity
level.
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
Highest intensity if three bars are shown on the
climate control display.
Fragrancing is switched off if no bars are dis‐
played.
The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐
played.
5. Select the desired setting.
Via iDrive
When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐
grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐
ing.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. "Fragrance"
When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐
ment, a Check Control message is displayed
5. "Fragrance"
Inserting fragrance cartridges
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
Fragrancing is switched on or off.
6. "Level"
7. Select the desired setting.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 298.
Display
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
General information
With operation via button, the menu of the Ambi‐
ent Air Package can be displayed on the Control
Display automatically.
Adjusting
Further settings can be adjusted.
Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
283
Climate control
CONTROLS
3. Remove the cover of the fragrance cartridge.
Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the
fragrance cartridge.
6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge
snaps lightly into place.
4. Insert the removed cover on the back side of
the fragrance cartridge.
7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages.
Make sure that no objects press against the
cartridge holder from below, otherwise the
function of the ambient air package could be
impacted.
8. Close the glove compartment.
Removing the fragrance cartridge
The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove
compartment.
1. Open the glove compartment, refer to
page 298.
5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
chip faces away from the cartridge holder.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder.
The cartridge holder slides down.
3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance
indicated on the Control Display.
284
Climate control
CONTROLS
Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐
grance indicated on the Control Display.
▷ To have the available voice commands read
out loud: ›Voice commands‹ or ›Help‹.
Using the voice activation
system
Most climate control functions can be used via
voice in the car's interior, e.g.:
▷ Activation of the air conditioner: ›Activate
climate control‹.
▷ Deactivation of the automatic recirculated-air
function: ›Deactivate ... air recirculation‹.
4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the
holder.
▷ Configuration of a specific tempera‐
ture: ›Temperature [...] at ...‹.
Recycling
Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken
to a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop for
recycling.
BMW Touch Command
The Ambient Air Package can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Using climate control
functions via voice
General information
▷ Instructions for the voice activation system,
refer to page 54.
▷ With voice operation, you can change be‐
tween voice operation, iDrive and buttons.
285
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Safety information
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Integrated Universal
Remote Control
Compatibility
If this symbol is printed on the packaging
or in the owner's manual of the system to
be controlled, the system is generally
compatible with the integrated Universal Remote
Control.
Concept
The integrated Universal Remote Control in the
interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of
remote-controlled systems such as garage door
drives, barriers, or lighting systems.
Additional questions are answered by:
▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
General information
▷ on the Internet.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐
ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐
sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the
particular system is required in order to program
the remote control.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐
tions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐
sible operation.
286
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
Control elements on the interior
mirror
6.
▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not
complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
systems.
Programming
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
onds: programming not completed.
General information
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be
fully charged at the time of programming to en‐
sure an optimal range of the integrated universal
remote control.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
peat steps 3 to 5.
1. Switch on standby state.
2. Initial setup:
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐
led system after repeated programming, please
check if the system to be controlled features a
rolling code radio system.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes
green rapidly. This erases all programming of
the buttons on the interior mirror.
Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will
slowly begin flashing orange.
For systems with a rolling code radio system, the
integrated Universal Remote Control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-
held transmitter.
Please read the owner's manual to find out how
to synchronize the system.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second
person.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
287
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Synchronizing the universal remote control with
the system:
▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
transmitter was detected but program‐
ming is not complete.
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
Press the button on the interior mirror for
2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐
cedure three times to complete the pro‐
gramming procedure.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
mirror as described.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the system being programmed, e.g. at the
garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds
for the next step.
If the integrated universal remote control
remains nonoperational, continue with the
special features for change code wireless
systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐
terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and
then release it. If necessary, repeat this step
up to three times in order to finish synchroni‐
zation. Once synchronization is complete, the
programmed function will be carried out.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐
onds: programming not completed.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
If the programming procedure is not completed,
the previous programming will remain un‐
changed.
Reprogramming individual
buttons
Operation
1. Switch on standby state.
Warning
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be
programmed.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in a
garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐
lease the button.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system
to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm
away from the buttons on the interior mirror.
The required distance depends on the hand-
held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐
erated using the button on the interior mirror
while the drive-ready or standby state is
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
within receiving range of the system until the
function is activated. The interior mirror LED
stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐
mitted.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐
terior mirror button and repeatedly press and
release the hand-held transmitter button for
2 seconds.
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐
ming procedure is completed.
Deleting stored functions
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
tions cannot be deleted individually.
Release the button.
288
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐
terior mirror simultaneously for approximately
10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror
flashes green rapidly.
Ashtray
Front center console
Opening
Sun visor
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the
side.
2. Push the cover forward again until it engages
behind the storage compartment.
3. Move it back to the desired position.
3. Fold the cover upward.
Folding up
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐
sor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind
a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror
lighting switches on.
Emptying
1. Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of
the cup holder.
289
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise to open it.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns.
Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette
lighter falls down or is held against the respec‐
tive objects. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and burn themselves.
3. Empty the container.
Always empty the ashtray with the container
open to prevent contamination of the lid.
Rear door
Opening
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Front center console
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
Press on the cover.
Emptying
2. Push the cover forward again until it engages
behind the storage compartment.
Grasp the insert on the side and remove it.
290
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup
holders.
The cigarette lighter is located between the cup
holders.
Tap the cover on the handle bar to close it.
Rear center console
Operation
Without rear console: opening and
closing
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when standby and drive-
ready state are switched on.
The cigarette lighter is on the left side.
Open: press on the cover.
To close: press the cover closed again.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
With rear console: opening and
closing
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the
airbags, such as portable navigation devices,
can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be
thrown around in the car's interior during un‐
folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
Push the cover backward until it engages.
291
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
devices and cables are not in the airbag's area
of unfolding.
Front center console
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery can
work with high voltages and currents, which
means that the 12 volt on-board network can
be overloaded or damaged. There is a risk of
damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting
aid terminals in the engine compartment.
Push the cover forward until it engages.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Rear center console
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage
to property. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Without rear console: opening and
closing
Front center armrest
One socket is located in the rear center console.
Open: press on the cover.
To close: press the cover closed again.
The center armrest contains a socket.
292
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
With rear console: opening and
closing
In the cargo area
A socket is located on the right side in the cargo
area. Unfold the cover.
Push the cover backward until it engages.
USB interface
General information
Follow the information regarding the connection
of mobile devices to the USB interface in the
section on USB connections, refer to page 73.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
Tap the cover on the handle bar to close it.
In the center armrest
With rear console: rear center
armrest
A USB interface is located in the center armrest.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
The center armrest contains a socket.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A.
293
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
In the front center console
In the rear center console
NOTICE
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large
USB connectors, may block or damage the
cover when it is being opened or closed. There
is a risk of damage to property. Make sure that
the area of movement of the cover is clear
while opening and closing it.
A USB interface with two USB ports is located in
the center console in the rear.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type C.
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A per connection.
Folding table in the rear
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
2. Push the cover forward again until it engages
behind the storage compartment.
General information
There is a folding table in the center armrest of
the rear console.
Safety information
Warning
A folded-out folding table protrudes into the
car's interior and, in case of accident, braking or
evasive maneuvers can cause injuries. Objects
on the table can be thrown around the car's in‐
terior while driving. There is a risk of injury. Do
not unfold or use folding table while driving.
A USB interface is located in the center console.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type A.
▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
294
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Folding open the folding table
1. Open the center armrest. Press the button
for this purpose.
Rear cooler
Safety information
Warning
The cover of the opened cooler protrudes into
the car's interior. Injuries can occur in the event
of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver.
The content of the cooler can be thrown into
the car's interior and injure occupants. There is
a risk of injury. Close the cooler after use when
driving.
2. Grasp the folding table at the rear and fold
forward in the center armrest.
NOTICE
If the cooler is lying down, the oil from the com‐
pressor will spread through the cooling circuit.
There is a risk of damage to property. Place the
cooler vertically for at least one hour prior to
operation so that the oil can return into the
compressor.
3. Pull the folding table from the center armrest.
4. Close the cover of the center armrest.
Opening
1. Fold down the center armrest, refer to
page 300.
5. Fold the folding table down and adjust as
needed.
2. Opening the through-loading system, refer to
page 306.
3. Pull on the handle and fold the cover forward.
Folding in the folding table
Proceed in reverse order to fold in the folding ta‐
ble.
295
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Switching on
Installing
The cooler can be operated at two levels.
1. Open the cover.
1. Switch on standby state.
2.
Press the button once for each cool‐
ing level.
The highest cooling power is active when two
LEDs are lit.
If the cooler was switched on the last time
standby state was switched off, it will be
switched on automatically the next time standby
state is switched on.
2. Slide the cooler into the guide rail, until it
stops.
Switching off
Press the button repeatedly until the LEDs go
out.
Ejecting
1. Fold the cover away to the side.
3. Fold the cover back and secure to cooler.
2. Pull on the rear handle.
Malfunction
Message
One of the LEDs flashes.
The cooler cannot be switched on or switches
off, for instance when the cooling system over‐
heats or if the battery voltage is low.
3. Pull cooler backward and remove it.
4. Fold the cover back.
296
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Rectifying the problem
1. If necessary, allow the refrigerator cooling
system to cool down.
2. Start the engine.
3. Switch on cooler.
If the LED flashes even after a short time, have
the cooler checked.
297
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and
options
Front passenger side glove
compartment
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Storage compartments
Opening
General information
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment switches on.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Locking
NOTICE
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove
compartment.
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐
age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not use anti-slip pads.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over without the
298
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is
parked by valet parking.
Safety information
Warning
Driver's side glove
compartment
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not use any breakable objects while driving.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
Safety information
Warning
Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes
in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐
partment can be thrown into the car's interior
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the
glove compartment immediately after using it.
Storage compartment in
the center console
Opening
Opening
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.
Pull the handle.
2. Push the cover forward again until it engages
behind the storage compartment.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
Closing
1. Touch the cover on the handle bar. The
cover closes up to the cup holders.
Compartments in the doors
2. Tap the cover again. The cover closes fully.
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
299
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Opening
Storage compartment in
the rear center console
The rear center console contains a storage com‐
partment.
Storage compartment
between the rear seats
Press the button.
General information
A storage compartment is located behind the
cover between the backrests.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Opening
Rear center armrest
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Folding down
Push the cover up until it engages.
Closing
Push the cover up again.
The cover slides down.
Center armrest, front
Reach into the recess and fold the center arm‐
rest forward.
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Opening
Depending on the equipment, proceed as fol‐
lows:
300
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,
arrow 2.
Opening
Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,
arrow 2.
Push the cover forward until it engages.
Press the button.
Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
301
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Closing
Without rear console: opening
and closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover
closes.
Opening
Rear cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an
evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled
liquids can distract from the traffic conditions
and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage
the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐
weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers.
Do not transport hot beverages.
Fold the center armrest forward.
Press the button.
Closing
Push back the cup holder.
With rear console: opening and
closing
Opening
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.
Push the cover backward until it engages.
Closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. The cover
closes.
302
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Clothes hooks
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐
weight objects, for instance clothing articles,
from the clothes hooks.
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear.
303
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and
options
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can shift and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional features offered with the series.
It also describes features and functions that are
not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due
to the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐
tems. When using these functions and systems,
the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Loading
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
Safety information
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐
age them internally and cause a sudden drop in
tire inflation pressure. Driving characteristics
may be negatively impacted, reducing lane sta‐
bility, lengthening the braking distances and
changing the steering response. There is a risk
of accident. Pay attention to the permitted load
capacity of the tires and never exceed the per‐
mitted gross weight.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐
hicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐
ble cargo and luggage load capacity is
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐
tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones,
can be thrown into the car's interior while driv‐
ing, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is
a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
car's interior.
650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐
304
Cargo area
CONTROLS
hicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Lashing eyes
Load
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
Multi-function hook
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
General information
A multi-function hook is located on the left side
in the cargo area.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
Safety information
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible,
directly behind and at the bottom of the rear
passenger seat backrests.
Warning
Improper use of the multi-function hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-function
hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately secured.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐
sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer
safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ Smaller and lighter cargo: secure with ratchet
straps or with a cargo net or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
General information
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps,
tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to
the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
305
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Folding down
Opening
Press on the multi-function hook and turn until it
engages.
Pull the handle.
With an emergency wheel:
storage compartment
Net
under the cargo area floor
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
There is a storage compartment under the cargo
floor panel.
Storage compartment on
the right side
A storage compartment is available on the right
side of the cargo area.
Storage compartment on
the left side
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
General information
A storage compartment is located on the left
side in the cargo area.
Through-loading system
Concept
The through-loading system allows the transport
of long objects, such as skies.
Without comfort seats: opening
through-loading
1. Fold down the center armrest.
306
Cargo area
CONTROLS
2. Remove flap.
With rear console
1. Push the cover up until it engages.
3. Pull handle, arrow 1, down and fold panel for‐
ward, arrow 2.
2. Pull on the loop.
With comfort seats: opening
through-loading
With an emergency wheel:
enlarging the cargo area
Without rear console
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Pull on the loop.
Concept
The emergency wheel and any related compo‐
nents can be temporarily removed to enlarge the
cargo area.
307
Cargo area
CONTROLS
7. Remove the storage well.
Removing the emergency wheel
and the storage compartments
1. To remove the cargo area floor, pull it upward
directly behind the rear backrests.
8. Insert the cargo floor panel.
Inserting the emergency wheel
and the storage compartments
Proceed in reverse order to insert the emergency
wheel and the storage compartments.
2. Open the ratchet strap.
3. Remove the tool holder.
Ski and snowboard bag
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
protective jacket in the cargo area.
Follow the installation and owner's manual in‐
cluded in the protective jacket.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: remove
the emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount
the ski and snowboard bag.
4. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐
age well.
5. Loosen the ratchet strap from the lashing
eyes.
6. Remove the storage compartment.
308
Cargo area
CONTROLS
309
310
